Honeywell Network Card UDC2500 User Manual
UDC2500  
Universal Digital Controller  
Product Manual  
51-52-25-127  
April 2007  
Honeywell Process Solutions  
Industrial Measurement and Control  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Document  
Abstract  
This document provides descriptions and procedures for the Installation, Configuration, Operation, and Troubleshooting of  
your UDC2500 Controller.  
Contacts  
World Wide Web  
The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.  
Honeywell Organization  
WWW Address (URL)  
http://www.honeywell.com  
Corporate  
Industrial Measurement and Control  
Technical tips  
http://www.honeywell.com/ps  
http://content.honeywell.com/ipc/faq  
Telephone  
Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below.  
Organization  
Phone Number  
United States and Canada  
Honeywell  
1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support  
1-800-525-7439 Service  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Symbol Definitions  
The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.  
Symbol  
Definition  
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for  
additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the manual.  
WARNING  
PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a  
potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4  
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible. Failure to comply with these instructions  
could result in death or serious injury.  
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for  
handling electrostatic sensitive devices  
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green  
or green/yellow) supply system conductor.  
Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity  
improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source  
of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.  
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to  
Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical  
code requirements.  
Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall  
be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and  
local electrical code requirements.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Contents  
1
2
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................1  
1.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................1  
1.2 Function of Displays and Keys.......................................................................................................3  
1.3 Process Instrument Explorer Software............................................................................................4  
1.4 CE Conformity (Europe).................................................................................................................5  
INSTALLATION.....................................................................................................7  
2.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................7  
2.2 Condensed Specifications ...............................................................................................................8  
2.3 Model Number Interpretation .......................................................................................................12  
2.4 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information.............................................................................14  
2.5 Mounting.......................................................................................................................................15  
2.6 Wiring ...........................................................................................................................................17  
2.6.1 Electrical Considerations ...................................................................................................17  
2.7 Wiring Diagrams...........................................................................................................................19  
3
CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................32  
3.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................32  
3.2 Configuration Prompt Hierarchy ..................................................................................................33  
3.3 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................34  
3.4 Tuning Set Up Group....................................................................................................................35  
3.5 SP Ramp Set Up Group ................................................................................................................39  
3.6 Accutune Set Up Group................................................................................................................43  
3.7 Algorithm Set Up Group...............................................................................................................46  
3.8 Output Set Up Group ....................................................................................................................51  
3.9 Input 1 Set Up Group....................................................................................................................55  
3.10  
3.11  
3.12  
3.13  
3.14  
3.15  
3.16  
3.17  
Input 2 Set Up Group ................................................................................................................59  
Control Set Up Group ...............................................................................................................61  
Options Group...........................................................................................................................67  
Communications Group ............................................................................................................73  
Alarms Set Up Group................................................................................................................76  
Display Set Up Group ...............................................................................................................82  
P.I.E. Tool Ethernet and Email Configuration Screens.............................................................84  
Configuration Record Sheet......................................................................................................87  
v
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
4
MONITORING AND OPERATING THE CONTROLLER.....................................89  
4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................89  
4.2 Operator Interface .........................................................................................................................90  
4.3 Entering a Security Code ..............................................................................................................90  
4.4 Lockout Feature ............................................................................................................................91  
4.5 Monitoring Your Controller..........................................................................................................93  
4.5.1 Annunciators......................................................................................................................93  
4.5.2 Viewing the operating parameters......................................................................................94  
4.5.3 Diagnostic Messages..........................................................................................................95  
4.6 Single Display Functionality.........................................................................................................97  
4.7 Start Up Procedure for Operation .................................................................................................99  
4.8 Control Modes ............................................................................................................................100  
4.8.1 Mode Definitions .............................................................................................................100  
4.8.2 What happens when you change modes...........................................................................101  
4.9 Setpoints......................................................................................................................................101  
4.10  
4.11  
Timer .......................................................................................................................................102  
Accutune III.............................................................................................................................104  
4.11.1  
Tune for Simplex Outputs ............................................................................................105  
Tune for Duplex (Heat/Cool) .......................................................................................105  
Using AUTOMATIC TUNE at start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool).................................106  
Using BLENDED TUNE at start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool)......................................106  
Using MANUAL TUNE at start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool).......................................107  
Error Codes...................................................................................................................109  
4.11.2  
4.11.3  
4.11.4  
4.11.5  
4.11.6  
4.12  
4.13  
4.14  
4.15  
4.16  
4.17  
4.18  
4.19  
4.20  
4.21  
4.22  
4.23  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression.................................................................................................110  
Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants......................................................................................110  
Alarm Setpoints.......................................................................................................................112  
Three Position Step Control Algorithm...................................................................................113  
Setting a Failsafe Output Value for Restart After a Power Loss.............................................114  
Setting Failsafe Mode..............................................................................................................115  
Setpoint Rate/Ramp/Program Overview .................................................................................115  
Setpoint Ramp.........................................................................................................................116  
Setpoint Rate ...........................................................................................................................117  
Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming .........................................................................................118  
P.I.E. Tool Maintenance Screens ............................................................................................125  
Configuring your Ethernet Connection...................................................................................131  
5
INPUT CALIBRATION.......................................................................................136  
5.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................136  
5.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values.....................................................................................137  
5.3 Preliminary Information..............................................................................................................139  
5.4 Input 1 Set Up Wiring.................................................................................................................140  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
5.5 Input 1 Calibration Procedure.....................................................................................................144  
5.6 Input 2 Set Up Wiring.................................................................................................................146  
5.7 Input 2 Calibration Procedure.....................................................................................................147  
5.8 Restore Input Factory Calibration...............................................................................................149  
6
7
OUTPUT CALIBRATION...................................................................................151  
6.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................151  
6.2 Current Output Calibration .........................................................................................................152  
6.3 Auxiliary Output Calibration ......................................................................................................154  
6.4 Restore Output Factory Calibration Procedure...........................................................................156  
TROUBLESHOOTING/SERVICE......................................................................158  
7.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................158  
7.2 Troubleshooting Aids..................................................................................................................159  
7.3 Power-up Tests............................................................................................................................161  
7.4 Status Tests .................................................................................................................................161  
7.5 Background Tests........................................................................................................................162  
7.6 Controller Failure Symptoms......................................................................................................164  
7.7 Troubleshooting Procedures .......................................................................................................165  
7.8 Restoring Factory Configuration ................................................................................................174  
7.9 Software Upgrades......................................................................................................................175  
8
9
PARTS LIST......................................................................................................177  
8.1 Exploded View............................................................................................................................177  
8.2 Removing the chassis..................................................................................................................179  
MODBUS RTU FUNCTION CODES..................................................................180  
9.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................180  
9.2 General Information....................................................................................................................180  
9.3 Function Code 20 (14h) - Read Configuration Reference Data..................................................182  
9.3.1 Read Configuration Examples .........................................................................................184  
9.4 Function Code 21 (15h) - Write Configuration Reference Data.................................................186  
9.4.1 Write Configuration Examples ........................................................................................188  
10  
MODBUS READ, WRITE AND OVERRIDE PARAMETERS PLUS EXCEPTION  
CODES........................................................................................................................189  
10.1  
10.2  
10.3  
10.4  
Overview .................................................................................................................................189  
Reading Control Data..............................................................................................................190  
Read Software Options Status.................................................................................................191  
Miscellaneous Read Onlys ......................................................................................................192  
vii  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
10.4.1  
10.4.2  
Register Addresses for Read Onlys..............................................................................192  
SetPoint Program Read Only Information....................................................................192  
10.5  
10.6  
10.7  
Setpoints..................................................................................................................................193  
Using a Computer Setpoint (Overriding Controller Setpoint) ................................................194  
Configuration Parameters........................................................................................................196  
10.7.1  
Tuning ..........................................................................................................................196  
SP Ramp/Rate/Program................................................................................................198  
Accutune.......................................................................................................................201  
Algorithm .....................................................................................................................202  
Output Algorithms........................................................................................................203  
Input 1...........................................................................................................................204  
Input 2...........................................................................................................................207  
Control..........................................................................................................................209  
Options .........................................................................................................................211  
10.7.2  
10.7.3  
10.7.4  
10.7.5  
10.7.6  
10.7.7  
10.7.8  
10.7.9  
10.7.10 Communications...........................................................................................................213  
10.7.11 Alarms ..........................................................................................................................214  
10.7.12 Display..........................................................................................................................217  
10.8  
Modbus RTU Exception Codes...............................................................................................218  
11  
12  
ETHERNET TCP/IP...........................................................................................220  
11.1  
Overview .................................................................................................................................220  
FURTHER INFORMATION................................................................................221  
Modbus RTU Serial Communications ....................................................................................221  
Modbus Messaging on TCP/IP................................................................................................221  
How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments..................221  
12.1  
12.2  
12.3  
13  
14  
INDEX ...............................................................................................................222  
SALES AND SERVICE......................................................................................226  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Tables  
Table 2-1 Condensed Specifications _____________________________________________________ 8  
Table 2-2 Control Relay Contact Information _____________________________________________ 14  
Table 2-3 Alarm Relay Contact Information ______________________________________________ 14  
Table 2-4 Mounting Procedure_________________________________________________________ 16  
Table 2-5 Permissible Wiring Bundling__________________________________________________ 18  
Table 2-6 Universal Output Functionality and Restrictions___________________________________ 20  
Table 2-7 Terminals for connecting a UDC to a MDI Compliant Hub or Switch __________________ 30  
Table 2-8 Terminals for connecting a UDC directly to a PC utilizing a straight-through cable________ 30  
Table 3-1 Configuration Topics ________________________________________________________ 32  
Table 3-2 Configuration Prompt Hierarchy _______________________________________________ 33  
Table 3-3 Configuration Procedure _____________________________________________________ 34  
Table 3-4 TUNING Group (Numeric Code 100) Function Prompts ____________________________ 35  
Table 3-5 SPRAMP Group (Numeric Code 200) Function Prompts ____________________________ 39  
Table 3-6 ATUNE Group (Numeric Code 300) Function Prompts _____________________________ 44  
Table 3-7 ALGOR Group (Numeric Code 400) Function Prompts _____________________________ 46  
Table 3-8 OUTPUT Group (Numeric Code 500) Function Prompts ____________________________ 51  
Table 3-9 INPUT 1 Group (Numeric Code 600) Function Prompts ____________________________ 55  
Table 3-10 INPUT2 Group (Numeric Code 700) Function Prompts ____________________________ 59  
Table 3-11 Table 3-12 CONTRL Group (Numeric Code 800) Function Prompts _________________ 61  
Table 3-13 OPTION Group (Numeric Code 900) Function Prompts ___________________________ 67  
Table 3-14 Communications Group (Numeric Code 1000) Function Prompts ____________________ 73  
Table 3-15 ALARMS Group (Numeric Code 1100) Function Prompts _________________________ 76  
Table 3-16 DISPLY Group (Numeric Code 1200) Function Prompts___________________________ 82  
Table 4-1 Procedure to Enter a Security Code _____________________________________________ 91  
Table 4-2 Annunciators ______________________________________________________________ 93  
Table 4-3 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts__________________________________________ 94  
Table 4-4 Diagnostic Messages_________________________________________________________ 95  
Table 4-5 Single Display Parameters ____________________________________________________ 98  
Table 4-6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller_________________________________________ 99  
Table 4-7 Control Mode Definitions ___________________________________________________ 100  
Table 4-8 Changing Control Modes (Dual Display Only) ___________________________________ 101  
Table 4-9 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints _____________________________________ 101  
Table 4-10 Procedure for Switching Between Setpoints ____________________________________ 102  
Table 4-11 Procedure for Starting “TUNE”______________________________________________ 105  
Table 4-12 Procedure for Using AUTOMATIC TUNE at Start-up for Duplex Control ____________ 106  
Table 4-13 Procedure for Using BLENDED TUNE at Start-up for Duplex Control_______________ 107  
Table 4-14 Procedure for Using MANUAL TUNE for Heat side of Duplex Control ______________ 107  
Table 4-15 Procedure for Using MANUAL TUNE for Cool side of Duplex Control______________ 108  
Table 4-16 Procedure for Accessing Accutune Error Codes _________________________________ 109  
Table 4-17 Accutune Error Codes _____________________________________________________ 109  
Table 4-18 Set Up Procedure _________________________________________________________ 111  
Table 4-19 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard ___________________________ 112  
Table 4-20 Procedure for Displaying Alarm Setpoints _____________________________________ 112  
Table 4-21 Procedure for Displaying 3Pstep Motor Position_________________________________ 113  
Table 4-22 Procedure for Setting a Failsafe Value_________________________________________ 114  
Table 4-23 Procedure for Setting a Failsafe Mode_________________________________________ 115  
Table 4-24 Running A Setpoint Ramp __________________________________________________ 116  
Table 4-25 Program Contents_________________________________________________________ 118  
ix  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Table 4-26 Run/Monitor Functions ____________________________________________________ 123  
Table 5-1 Voltage, Milliamp and Resistance Equivalents for Input 1 Range Values ______________ 137  
Table 5-2 Voltage and Milliamp Equivalents for Input 2 Range Values ________________________ 139  
Table 5-3 Equipment Needed_________________________________________________________ 139  
Table 5-4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath ________________ 140  
Table 5-5 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs using Thermocouple Source ________ 141  
Table 5-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for RTD Inputs _______________________________________ 141  
Table 5-7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Radiamatic, Millivolts, Volts or Thermocouple Differential Inputs  
(Except 0-10 Volts) _____________________________________________________________ 142  
Table 5-8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 to 10 Volts ______________________________________ 143  
Table 5-9 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Milliampere Inputs _________________________________ 143  
Table 5-10 Input 1 Calibration Procedure (Numeric Code 10000) ____________________________ 144  
Table 5-11 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Inputs – Input 2______________ 146  
Table 5-12 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 to 2 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts, or 1 to 5 Volts – Input 2________ 147  
Table 5-13 Input 2 Calibration Procedure (Numeric Code 20000) ____________________________ 148  
Table 5-14 Restore Factory Calibration _________________________________________________ 149  
Table 6-1 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Current Output ____________________________________ 152  
Table 6-2 Current Output Calibration Procedure (Numeric Code 30000) ______________________ 153  
Table 6-3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output___________________________________ 154  
Table 6-4 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure (Numeric Code 50000) _____________________ 155  
Table 6-5 Restore Factory Calibration Procedure _________________________________________ 156  
Table 7-1 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version __________________________________ 160  
Table 7-2 Procedure for Displaying the Status Test (Numeric Code 1200) Results _______________ 161  
Table 7-3 Background Tests__________________________________________________________ 162  
Table 7-4 Controller Failure Symptoms_________________________________________________ 164  
Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms ______________________________________ 166  
Table 7-6 Troubleshooting Current Output Failure ________________________________________ 166  
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting Three Position Step Control Output Failure ________________________ 167  
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure _______________________________ 168  
Table 7-9 Troubleshooting Current/Time or Time/Current Proportional Output Failure ___________ 169  
Table 7-10 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure ___________________________________ 170  
Table 7-11 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure __________________________________________ 171  
Table 7-12 Troubleshooting a RS-485 Communications Failure______________________________ 172  
Table 7-13 Troubleshooting an Ethernet Communications Failure ____________________________ 173  
Table 7-14 Troubleshooting Auxiliary Output Failure _____________________________________ 173  
Table 7-15 Restoring Factory Configuration _____________________________________________ 174  
Table 7-16 Software Upgrades________________________________________________________ 175  
Table 8-1 Parts Identification _________________________________________________________ 178  
Table 8-2 Parts Not Shown___________________________________________________________ 178  
Table 8-3 Software Upgrades (see Section 7.9) ___________________________________________ 178  
Table 9-1 Integer Parameter Type _____________________________________________________ 181  
Table 9-2 Floating Point Parameter Type________________________________________________ 181  
Table 9-3 Register Address Format for Function Code 20___________________________________ 183  
Table 9-4 Register Address Format for Function Code 21___________________________________ 187  
Table 10-1 Control Data Parameters ___________________________________________________ 191  
Table 10-2 Option Status ____________________________________________________________ 191  
Table 10-3 Miscellaneous Read Onlys__________________________________________________ 192  
Table 10-4 SetPoint Program Read Only Information ______________________________________ 192  
Table 10-5 Setpoint Code Selections ___________________________________________________ 193  
Table 10-6 Setpoint Associated Parameters ______________________________________________ 193  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Table 10-7 Computer Setpoint Selection ________________________________________________ 194  
Table 10-8 Computer Setpoint Associated Parameters _____________________________________ 195  
Table 10-9 Set-up Group – Tuning ____________________________________________________ 196  
Table 10-10 Set-up Group – Setpoint Ramp/Rate _________________________________________ 198  
Table 10-11 Set-up Group – Accutune__________________________________________________ 201  
Table 10-12 Set-up Group – Algorithm _________________________________________________ 202  
Table 10-13 Set-up Group – Output____________________________________________________ 203  
Table 10-14 Set-up Group – Input 1____________________________________________________ 204  
Table 10-15 Set-up Group – Input 2____________________________________________________ 207  
Table 10-16 Set-up Group – Control ___________________________________________________ 209  
Table 10-17 Set-up Group – Options ___________________________________________________ 211  
Table 10-18 Set-up Group – Communications____________________________________________ 213  
Table 10-19 Set-up Group – Alarms ___________________________________________________ 214  
Table 10-20 Set-up Group – Display ___________________________________________________ 217  
Table 10-21 Modbus RTU Data Layer Status Exception Codes ______________________________ 219  
xi  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Figures  
Figure 1-1 UDC2500 Operator Interface (all display items shown) _____________________________ 2  
Figure 1-2 Screen capture of Process Instrument Explorer running on a Pocket PC _________________ 4  
Figure 1-3 Depiction of infrared communications ___________________________________________ 5  
Figure 2-1 Model Number Interpretation_________________________________________________ 13  
Figure 2-2 Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)____________________________________________ 15  
Figure 2-3 Mounting Methods _________________________________________________________ 16  
Figure 2-4 Composite Wiring Diagram __________________________________________________ 21  
Figure 2-5 Mains Power Supply________________________________________________________ 22  
Figure 2-6 Input 1 Connections ________________________________________________________ 23  
Figure 2-7 Input 2 Connections ________________________________________________________ 24  
Figure 2-8 Electromechanical Relay Output ______________________________________________ 24  
Figure 2-9 Solid State Relay Output ____________________________________________________ 25  
Figure 2-10 Open Collector Output _____________________________________________________ 26  
Figure 2-11 Dual Electromechanical Relay Option Output ___________________________________ 27  
Figure 2-12 Current Output ___________________________________________________________ 27  
Figure 2-13 Three Position Step Control Connections w/o Dual Relay Option____________________ 28  
Figure 2-14 Three Position Step Control Connections with Dual Relay Option ___________________ 28  
Figure 2-15 RS-422/485 Communications Option Connections _______________________________ 29  
Figure 2-16 Ethernet Communications Option Connections __________________________________ 29  
Figure 2-17 Auxiliary Output and Digital Inputs Option Connections __________________________ 30  
Figure 2-18 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA — 2 wire Transmitter Using Open Collector Alarm 2 Output31  
Figure 2-19 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA — 2 Wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output ________ 31  
Figure 3-1 Ethernet Configuration Screen ________________________________________________ 84  
Figure 3-2 Email Configuration Screen __________________________________________________ 85  
Figure 4-1 Operator Interface__________________________________________________________ 90  
Figure 4-2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of the UDC2500 Controller ____________________ 96  
Figure 4-3 Ramp/Soak Profile Example_________________________________________________ 121  
Figure 4-4 Program Record Sheet _____________________________________________________ 122  
Figure 4-5 Maintenance Data Menu____________________________________________________ 125  
Figure 4-6 Loop Data Maintenance Screen ______________________________________________ 126  
Figure 4-7 Alarm Details Maintenance Screen ___________________________________________ 127  
Figure 4-8 Digital Input Details Screen _________________________________________________ 128  
Figure 4-9 Status Data Maintenance Screen______________________________________________ 129  
Figure 4-10 Ethernet Status Maintenance Screen__________________________________________ 130  
Figure 4-11 IR Communications Address _______________________________________________ 131  
Figure 4-12 Online Configuration _____________________________________________________ 132  
Figure 4-13 Configuration Upload in Progress ___________________________________________ 132  
Figure 4-14 Ethernet Communications Type Selection _____________________________________ 133  
Figure 4-15 Ethernet Communications Address __________________________________________ 134  
Figure 4-16 Configuration Upload in Progress ___________________________________________ 135  
Figure 5-1 Input 1 and Input 2 Wiring Terminals _________________________________________ 139  
Figure 5-2 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath ____________________ 140  
Figure 5-3 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using Thermocouple Source ___________ 141  
Figure 5-4 Wiring Connections for RTD (Resistance Thermometer Device) ____________________ 141  
Figure 5-5 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Thermocouple Differential, Millivolts or Volts (Except 0 to 10  
Volts) ________________________________________________________________________ 142  
Figure 5-6 Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volts__________________________________________ 143  
Figure 5-7 Wiring Connections for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Inputs__________________________ 143  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Figure 5-8 Wiring Connections for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Input – Input 2___________________ 146  
Figure 5-9 Wiring Connections for 0 to 2 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts or 1 to 5 Volts Input – Input 2________ 147  
Figure 6-1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Output ______________________________ 152  
Figure 6-2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output_____________________________ 154  
Figure 8-1 UDC2500 Exploded View __________________________________________________ 177  
Figure 10-1 Software Option Status Information__________________________________________ 191  
xiii  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1 Introduction  
1.1 Overview  
Function  
The UDC2500 is a microprocessor-based stand-alone controller. It combines a high  
degree of functionality and operating simplicity in a 1/4 DIN size controller. This  
instrument is an ideal controller for regulating temperature and other process variables in  
numerous heating and cooling applications, as well as in metal working, food,  
pharmaceuticals, semiconductor, testing and environmental work.  
The UDC2500 monitors and controls temperatures and other variables in applications  
such as environmental chambers, plastic processing machines, furnaces and ovens, and  
packaging machinery.  
Features  
• 90 – 264 Vac or 24 Vac/dc Power Supply  
• Input/Output Isolation  
• Isolated Auxiliary Current Output / Digital Inputs  
• Modbus® RS-485, Infrared, or Ethernet TCP/IP Communications  
• Infrared interface  
• Timer  
• Accutune III Tuning with Fuzzy Logic Overshoot Suppression.  
• 2nd Input (Remote Setpoint)  
• Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Program  
• Three Position Step Control  
• Duplex (Heat/Cool)  
Easy to Read Displays  
The dedicated vacuum fluorescent displays with multi-language prompts make the  
operator interface easy to read, understand and operate. Programmed sequences of  
displays assure quick and accurate entry of all configurable parameters.  
Easy to Operate  
Simple keystrokes let you select input and range configuration, set the operating  
parameters that meet you process control needs now, and change them later to meet new  
ones.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Mount Anywhere  
This instrument is intended for industrial control applications. It must be panel mounted  
with the wiring terminals enclosed within the panel. The instrument is environmentally  
hardened and, when suitably enclosed, can be mounted anywhere in plant or factory, on  
the wall, or even on the process machine itself. The front face is NEMA3 and IP55 rated  
and can be easily changed to NEMA4X and IP66 for the most severe hose-down  
applications. It withstands ambient temperatures up to 55°C (133°F) and resists the  
effects of vibration and shock.  
Figure 1-1 UDC2500 Operator Interface (all display items shown)  
2
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
1.2 Function of Displays and Keys  
Table 1-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function.  
Table 1-1Function of Displays and Keys  
Key  
Function  
• Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group select mode.  
Sequentially displays Set Up groups and allows the FUNCTION key to  
display individual functions in each Set Up group.  
Setup  
• Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the individual functions of  
a selected Configuration Set Up group.  
Function  
• Used during field calibration procedure.  
• Selects an operating parameter to be shown in the lower display. See  
Section 4.5.2 for a list of the operating parameters and Section 4.5.3 for a list  
of the diagnostic messages.  
Lower  
Display  
• Alternately selects:  
AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint value in engineering  
M-A  
Reset  
units.  
MAN  
Lower display automatically indicates output in %.  
RESET Only used on Limit Controllers to reset the Limit Relay.  
• Setpoint Select Hold key down to cycle through configured setpoints.  
SP  
Select  
• Alternate action switch initiates or holds the Setpoint Ramp or Setpoint  
Program.  
Run  
Hold  
• Acknowledges a latched alarm 1.  
• Acknowledges Diagnostic Messages.  
• Increases the selected parameter value.  
• Decreases the selected parameter value.  
Note 1: Value can be changed if in manual mode. For Three Position Step Control when a slidewire is  
not used, the output value is the estimated motor position.  
Note 2: Value can be changed via increment/decrement keys.  
Note 3: The selected set can be changed via increment/decrement keys.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
1.3 Process Instrument Explorer Software  
Overview  
Process Instrument Explorer lets you configure your instrument on a desktop/laptop or  
Pocket PC. For details see Process Instrument Explorer manual #51-52-25-131.  
Features  
• Create configurations with intuitive software program running on either a Pocket  
PC, a Desktop or a laptop computer. ·  
• Create/edit configurations live, just connect software to controller via comm port.·  
• Create/edit configurations offline and download to controller later via comm. port.·  
• Port types available on every UDC2500:·  
o Infrared  
o RS 485  
o Ethernet  
• Same port types on UDC3200 and UDC3500 allow interconnectivity.  
• This software is available in English, Spanish, Italian, German and French.  
Figure 1-2 Screen capture of Process Instrument Explorer running on a Pocket  
PC  
Infrared communications  
The infrared connection provides a non-intrusive wireless connection with the instrument  
and maintains NEMA4X AND IP66 integrity.  
4
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
No need to get access to the back of the controller to communicate with the instrument,  
no need to take your screw driver to wire the communication cable, no wiring mistake  
possible. You can now duplicate an instrument’s configuration, upload or download a  
new configuration in a matter of seconds, just by pointing your Pocket PC in the direction  
of the instrument.  
It takes just a few seconds to upload a configuration from an instrument. You can then  
save the configuration file onto your PC or pocket PC for review, modification or  
archiving. Furthermore, this software also gives you important maintenance information  
on the controller: instantly, get information on the current operating parameters, digital  
inputs and alarm status, identify internal or analog input problems.  
Question: What if I have several controllers on the same panel? How can I be sure I am  
communicating with the correct one?  
Answer: The infrared port of the controller is normally “off”. You activate the infrared  
port by pressing any controller’s key. You can now communicate. After 4 minutes, the  
port will be shut down again. Also, in the Communications Group “IR ENABLE” may be  
disabled to prohibit IR communications.  
Figure 1-3 Depiction of infrared communications  
1.4 CE Conformity (Europe)  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European  
Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC  
Directive. Conformity of this product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be  
assumed.  
Product Classification: Class I: Permanently connected, panel-mounted Industrial  
Control Equipment with protective earthing (grounding) (EN61010-1).  
Enclosure Rating: This controller must be panel-mounted with the rear terminals  
enclosed within the panel. The front panel of the controller is rated at NEMA4X and IP66  
when properly installed.  
Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II (EN61010-1)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Pollution Degree: Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution with  
occasional conductivity caused by condensation. (Ref. IEC 664-1)  
EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment (EN61326, emissions), Industrial  
Equipment (EN61326, immunity)  
Method of EMC Assessment: Technical File (TF)  
Declaration of Conformity: 51453655  
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and the special  
conditions for CE conformity in Subsection 2.1, may invalidate this product’s conformity  
with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives.  
ATTENTION  
The emission limits of EN61326 are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial  
environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful  
interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the  
equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the antenna(e). In special  
cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may  
have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the  
electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.  
WARNING  
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the  
protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.  
6
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
2 Installation  
2.1 Overview  
Introduction  
Installation of the UDC2500 consists of mounting and wiring the controller according to  
the instructions given in this section. Read the pre-installation information, check the  
model number interpretation (Subsection 2.3), and become familiar with your model  
selections, then proceed with installation.  
What’s in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
2.1 Overview  
7
2.2 Condensed Specifications  
2.3 Model Number Interpretation  
2.4 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information  
2.5 Mounting  
8
12  
14  
15  
17  
2.6 Wiring  
2.7 Wiring Diagrams  
19  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Composite Wiring Diagram  
AC Line Voltage  
Input 1 Connections  
Input 2 Connections  
Relay Output  
Electromechanical  
Solid State  
Open Collector  
24  
25  
26  
27  
27  
28  
28  
29  
29  
30  
31  
31  
Dual Electromechanical Relay  
Current Output Connections  
Three Position Step Control Connections w/o Dual Relay  
Three Position Step Control Connections with Dual Relay  
RS-422/485 Communications Option  
Ethernet Communications Option  
Auxiliary Output and Digital Inputs Option  
Transmitter Power using Open Collector Output  
Transmitter Power using Auxiliary Output  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Pre-installation Information  
If the controller has not been removed from its shipping carton, inspect the carton for  
damage then remove the controller.  
• Inspect the unit for any obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to  
transit to the carrier.  
• Make sure a bag containing mounting hardware is included in the carton with the  
controller.  
• Check that the model number shown on the inside of the case agrees with what you  
have ordered.  
2.2 Condensed Specifications  
Honeywell recommends that you review and adhere to the operating limits listed in Table  
2-1 when you install your controller.  
Table 2-1 Condensed Specifications  
Specifications  
Accuracy:  
Analog Inputs  
± 0.25% of full scale typical (± 1 digit for display)  
Can be field calibrated to ± 0.05% of full scale typical  
16-bit resolution typical  
Sampling Rate: Both inputs are sampled six times per second  
Temperature Stability: ± 0.01% of Full Scale span / ˚C change—typical  
Input Impedance:  
4-20 Milliampere Input: 250 ohms  
0-10 Volt Input: 200K ohms  
All Others: 10 megohms  
Maximum Lead Wire Resistance:  
Thermocouples: 50 ohms/leg  
100 ohm, 200 ohm and 500 ohm RTD: 100 ohms/leg  
100 ohm Low RTD: 10 ohms/leg  
Burnout Selections: Upscale, Downscale, Failsafe or None  
Thermocouple Health: Good, Failing, Failure Imminent or Failed  
Failsafe Output Level: Configurable 0-100% of Output range  
Analog Input Signal  
Failure Operation  
Stray Rejection  
Common Mode  
AC (50 or 60 Hz): 120 dB (with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms) or ± 1 LSB (least  
significant bit) whichever is greater with line voltage applied.  
DC: 120 dB (with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms) or a ±1 LSB whichever is  
greater with 120 Vdc applied.  
DC (to 1 KHz): 80 dB (with maximum source of impedance of 100 ohms) or ±1 LSB  
whichever is greater with 50 Vac applied.  
Normal Mode  
AC (50 or 60 Hz): 60 dB (with 100 % span peak-to-peak maximum)  
+30 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts. Digital Inputs are  
isolated from line power, earth ground, analog inputs and all outputs except for the Second  
Current Output.  
Digital Inputs (Two)  
(Optional)  
The second Digital Input is mutually exclusive with the Second Current Output.  
8
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Specifications  
Electromechanical Relays (One or Two)  
SPDT contacts. Both Normally Open and Normally Closed contacts are brought out to the  
rear terminals. Internally socketed.  
Controller Output  
Types  
Resistive Load: 5 amps @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc  
Inductive Load (cosϕ = 0.4): 3 amps @ 130 Vac or 250 Vac  
Inductive Load (L/R = 7 msec): 3.5 amps @ 30 Vdc  
Motor: 1/6 H.P.  
Dual Electromechanical Relays  
Two SPST contacts. One Normally Closed contact for each relay is brought out to the rear  
terminals. Useful for Time Duplex or Three Position Step control applications, this option  
takes the place of one of the above electromechanical relays, thus saving it for use as an  
alarm. Units with this output option may have two additional relays (total of four relays) plus  
the Second Current Output. Relays are internally socketed.  
Resistive Load: 2 amps @ 120 Vac, 240 Vac or 30 Vdc  
Inductive Load (cosϕ = 0.4): 1 amp @ 130 Vac or 250 Vac  
Inductive Load (L/R = 7 msec): 1 amp @ 30 Vdc  
Solid State Relays (One or Two)  
Zero-crossing type SPST solid state contacts consisting of a triac N.O. output. Internally  
socketed.  
Resistive Load: 1.0 amp @ 25°C and 120 or 240 Vac, 0.5 amp @ 55°C and 120 or 240 Vac  
Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac  
Minimum Load: 20 milliamps  
Open Collector Outputs (One or Two)  
Socketed assembly replacing a relay. Opto-isolated from all other circuits except current  
output and not from each other. Internally powered @ 30 Vdc.  
Note: Applying an external power supply to this output will damage the instrument.  
Maximum Sink Current: 20 mA  
Short-circuit current limit: 100 mA  
Current Outputs (One or Two)  
These outputs provide a 21 mA dc maximum into a negative or positive grounded load or into  
a non-grounded load. Current outputs are isolated from each other, line power, earth ground  
and all inputs. Outputs can be easily configured via the keyboard for either direct or reverse  
action and for either 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA without field calibration.  
The second current output can be used in an Auxiliary Output mode. This Auxiliary Output  
can be configured to represent either Input, PV, Setpoint, Deviation, or Control output. The  
range of an Auxiliary Output can be scaled per the range of the selected variable and can be  
set anywhere between 0 to 21 mA. The Second Current Output is mutually exclusive with the  
second Digital Input.  
Resolution: 12 bits over 0 to 21 mA  
Accuracy: 0.05% of full scale  
Temperature Stability: 0.01% F.S./°C  
Load Resistance: 0 to 1000 ohms  
One SPDT Electromechanical relay. A second alarm is available if the second control relay  
is not used for control purposes or when the Dual Relay Option is used.  
Alarm Outputs  
(Optional)  
Up to four setpoints are independently set as high or low alarm, two for each relay. Setpoint  
can be on any Input, Process Variable, Deviation, Manual Mode, Failsafe, PV Rate, RSP  
Mode, Communication Shed, or Output. A single adjustable hysteresis of 0.0 to 100.0% is  
provided. The alarm can also be set as an ON or OFF event at the beginning of a Setpoint  
ramp/soak segment.  
Alarm Relay Contacts Rating: Resistive Load: 5 amps at 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc  
Analog Inputs: are isolated from all other circuits at 850Vdc for 2 seconds, but not from each  
Isolation (Functional)  
other.  
Analog Outputs: are isolated from all other circuits at 850Vdc for 2 seconds.  
AC Power: is electrically isolated from all other inputs and outputs to withstand a HIPOT  
potential of 1900Vdc for 2 seconds per Annex K of EN61010-1.  
Relay Contacts: with a working voltage of 115/230 Vac, are isolated from each other and all  
other circuits at 345Vdc for 2 seconds.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Specifications  
Baud Rate: 4800, 9600,19,200 or 38,400 baud selectable  
Data Format: Floating point or integer  
Length of Link:  
2000 ft (600 m) max. with Belden 9271 Twinax Cable and 120 ohm termination resistors  
4000 ft. (1200 m) max. with Belden 8227 Twinax Cable and 100 ohm termination resistors  
Link Characteristics: Two-wire, multi-drop Modbus RTU protocol, 15 drops maximum or up  
to 31 drops for shorter link length.  
RS422/485 Modbus  
RTU  
Communications  
Interface (Optional)  
Type: 10Base-T  
Ethernet TCP/IP  
Communications  
Interface (Optional)  
Length of Link: 330 ft. (100 m) maximum. Use Shielded twisted-pair, Category 5 (STP  
CAT5) Ethernet cable.  
Link Characteristics: Four-wire plus shield, single drop, five hops maximum  
IP Address: IP Address is 10.0.0.2 as shipped from the Factory  
Recommended network configuration: Use Switch rather than Hub in order to maximize  
UDC Ethernet performance.  
Configuration: Ethernet parameters are configured via the Process Instrument Explorer.  
Email: The capability to send an Email is provided. This must be configured via the Process  
Instrument Explorer.  
Type: Serial Infrared (SIR)  
Infrared  
Length of Link: 3 ft. (1 m) maximum for IrDA 1.0 compliant devices  
Baud Rate: 19,200 or 38,400 baud selectable  
Communications  
(Optional)  
Power Consumption  
20 VA maximum (90 to 264 Vac)  
15 VA maximum (24 Vac/dc)  
Power Inrush Current  
10A maximum for 4 ms (under operating conditions), reducing to a maximum of 225 mA (90  
to 264 Vac operation) or 750 mA (24 Vac/dc operation) after one second.  
CAUTION  
When applying power to more than one instrument, make sure that sufficient  
power is supplied. Otherwise, the instruments may not start up normally due to voltage drop  
from the inrush current.  
Weight  
3 lbs. (1.3 kg)  
10  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Environmental and Operating Conditions  
Parameter  
Reference  
Rated  
Operative  
Limits  
Transportation and  
Storage  
25 ± 3 °C  
15 to 55 °C  
58 to 131 °F  
0 to 55 °C  
32 to 131 °F  
–40 to 66 °C  
–40 to 151 °F  
Ambient Temperature  
Relative Humidity  
77 ± 5 °F  
10 to 55*  
10 to 90*  
5 to 90*  
5 to 95*  
Vibration  
0
0
0 to 70  
0.4  
0 to 200  
0.6  
0 to 200  
0.5  
Frequency (Hz)  
Acceleration (g)  
Mechanical Shock  
Acceleration (g)  
Duration (ms))  
0
0
1
30  
5
30  
20  
30  
+24 ± 1  
22 to 27  
90 to 240  
20 to 27  
20 to 27  
90 to 264  
20 to 27  
- -  
Line Voltage (Vdc)  
Line Voltage (Vac)  
90 to 240 Vac  
120 ± 1  
240 ± 2  
- -  
- -  
24 ± 1  
- -  
24 Vac  
50 ± 0.2  
60 ± 0.2  
49 to 51  
59 to 61  
48 to 52  
58 to 62  
- -  
- -  
Frequency (Hz)  
(For Vac)  
* The maximum moisture rating only applies up to 40 °C (104 °F). For higher temperatures, the RH specification is  
derated to maintain constant moisture content.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
2.3 Model Number Interpretation  
Introduction  
Write your controller’s model number in the spaces provided below and circle the corresponding  
items in each table. This information will also be useful when you wire your controller.  
Instructions  
Select the desired key number. The arrow to the right marks the selection available.  
Make the desired selections from Tables I through VI using the column below the  
proper arrow.  
A dot ( ) denotes availability.  
Key Number  
I
II  
III  
IV  
V
VI  
_ _ _ _ _ _  
-
_ _  
-
_ _ _ _  
-
_ _ _  
-
_ _ _ _ _  
-
_ _  
_
KEY NUMBER - UDC2500 Single Loop Controller  
Description  
Digital Controller for use with 90 to 264Vac Power  
Digital Controller for use with 24Vac/dc Power  
Selection Availability  
DC2500  
DC2501  
TABLE I - Specify Control Output and/or Alarms  
0 _  
C _  
E _  
A _  
T _  
R _  
_ 0  
_ B  
_ E  
_ A  
_ T  
None (Can be used as an indicator only)  
Current Output (4 to 20ma, 0 to 20 ma)  
Electro Mechanical Relay (5 Amp Form C)  
Solid State Relay (1 Amp)  
Output #1  
Open Collector transistor output  
Dual 2 Amp Relays (Both are Form A) (Heat/Cool Applications)  
No Additional Outputs or Alarms  
One Alarm Relay Only  
Output #2 and Alarm  
#1 or Alarms 1 and 2  
E-M Relay (5 Amp Form C) Plus Alarm 1 (5 Amp Form C Relay)  
Solid State Relay (1 Amp) Plus Alarm 1 (5 Amp Form C Relay)  
Open Collector Plus Alarm 1 (5 Amp Form C Relay)  
TABLE II - Communications and Software Selections  
None  
0 _ _ _  
1 _ _ _  
2 _ _ _  
3 _ _ _  
_ 0 _ _  
_ A _ _  
_ B _ _  
Auxiliary Output/Digital Inputs (1 Aux and 1 DI or 2 DI)  
RS-485 Modbus Plus Auxiliary Output/Digital Inputs  
Communications  
10 Base-T Ethernet (Modbus RTU) Plus Auxiliary Output/Digital Inputs  
Standard Functions, Single Display  
Dual Display with Auto/Manual  
Software Selections  
Set Point Programming (12 Segments) Dual Display, Auto/Manual  
Limit Controller  
_ L _ _  
_ _ 0 _  
a
a
Reserved  
No Selection  
None  
_ _ _ 0  
_ _ _ R  
Infrared interface  
Infrared Interface Included (Can be used with a Pocket PC)  
Availability  
DC 2500 2501  
Selection  
TABLE III - Input 1 can be changed in the field using external resistors  
TC, RTD, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V  
1 _ _  
2 _ _  
3 _ _  
_ 00  
_ 10  
Input 1  
Input 2  
TC, RTD, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA  
TC, RTD, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-10V  
None  
0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20mA, 4-20mA  
b
c
b
c
TABLE IV - Options  
CE, UL and CSA (Standard)  
CE, UL, CSA and FM  
0 _ _ _ _  
1 _ _ _ _  
2 _ _ _ _  
_ 0 _ _ _  
_ T _ _ _  
_ _ 0 _ _  
_ _ _ 0 _  
_ _ _ _ 0  
Approvals  
CE Only  
None  
Tags  
Stainless Steel Customer ID Tag - 3 lines w/22 characters/line  
None  
None  
None  
Future Options  
12  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
TABLE V - Product Manuals  
Product Information on CD - English  
0 _  
E _  
F _  
G _  
I _  
S _  
_ 0  
_ C  
English (Hard Copy) Manual  
French (Hard Copy) Manual  
German (Hard Copy) Manual  
Italian (Hard Copy) Manual  
Spanish (Hard Copy) Manual  
None  
(51-52-25-127)  
(51-52-25-127-FR)  
(51-52-25-127-DE)  
(51-52-25-127-IT)  
(51-52-25-127-SP)  
Manuals  
Certificate  
Certificate of Conformance (F3391)  
TABLE VI  
No Selection  
None  
0
RESTRICTIONS  
Available Only With  
Not Available With  
Selection  
Restriction Letters  
Table  
Selection  
E _  
Table  
I
I
I
A _  
a
T _  
Limit Controller Restrictions/Comments:  
1. FM approved units with communications are limited to read only.  
2. UL listed for regulatory use only.  
b
c
_ L _ _  
II  
I
_ L _ _  
C _, R _  
II  
Figure 2-1 Model Number Interpretation  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2.4 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information  
Control Relays  
ATTENTION  
Control relays operate in the standard control mode (that is, energized when output state is on).  
Table 2-2 Control Relay Contact Information  
Unit Power  
Off  
Control Relay  
Wiring  
Control Relay  
Contact  
Output #1 or #2  
Indicator Status  
N.O.  
N.C.  
N.O.  
Open  
Closed  
Open  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Closed  
Closed  
Open  
N.C.  
Alarm Relays  
ATTENTION  
Alarm relays are designed to operate in a failsafe mode (that is, de-energized during alarm  
sate). This results in alarm actuation when power is OFF or when initially applied, until the unit  
completes self diagnostics. If power is lost to the unit, the alarms will de-energize and thus the  
alarm contacts will close.  
Table 2-3 Alarm Relay Contact Information  
Unit  
Power  
Alarm Relay Variable NOT in Alarm State  
Wiring  
Variable in Alarm State  
Relay  
Indicators  
Relay  
Indicators  
Contact  
Contact  
N.O.  
N.C.  
N.O.  
N.C.  
Open  
Closed  
Closed  
Open  
Open  
Closed  
Open  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
Closed  
14  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2.5 Mounting  
Physical Considerations  
The controller can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel using the mounting kit  
supplied. Adequate access space must be available at the back of the panel for installation  
and servicing activities.  
• Overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the controller are  
shown in Figure 2-2.  
• The controller’s mounting enclosure must be grounded according to CSA standard  
C22.2 No. 0.4 or Factory Mutual Class No. 3820 paragraph 6.1.5.  
• The front panel is moisture rated NEMA3 and IP55 rated and can be easily upgraded  
to NEMA4X and IP66.  
Overall Dimensions  
Max. panel thickness  
19,1  
mm  
inches  
9,0  
.75  
0,35  
90,6  
3,57  
108,6  
4,28  
92,0 + 0,8  
- 0,00  
3,62 + 0,03  
-0,00  
Panel  
Cutout  
92,0 + 0,8  
- 0,00  
3,62 + 0,03  
-0,00  
113,1  
4,45  
17,9  
0,70  
Figure 2-2 Mounting Dimensions (not to scale)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Mounting Method  
Before mounting the controller, refer to the nameplate on the outside of the case and  
make a note of the model number. It will help later when selecting the proper wiring  
configuration.  
Mounting clips  
Attach screws and  
washers here for  
water protection  
Figure 2-3 Mounting Methods  
Mounting Procedure  
Table 2-4 Mounting Procedure  
Step  
1
Action  
Mark and cut out the controller hole in the panel according to the dimension  
information in Figure 2-2.  
Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the front.  
2
3
Remove the mounting kit from the shipping container and install the kit as follows:  
•
For normal installation two mounting clips are required. Insert the prongs of the  
clips into the two holes in the top and bottom center of the case (Figure 2-3).  
•
For water-protected installation four mounting clips are required. There are two  
options of where to install the mounting clips: 1) Insert the prongs of the clips into  
the two holes on the left and right side of the top and bottom of the case or 2) on  
the center on each of the four sides (Figure 2-3).  
•
Tighten screws to 2 lb-inch (22 N•cm) to secure the case against the panel.  
CAUTION: Over tightening will cause distortion and the unit may not seal properly.  
For water-protected installation, install four screws with washers into the four recessed  
areas in the corners of the front bezel (Figure 2-3). Push the point of the screw  
through the center piercing the elastomeric material and then tighten screws to 5 lb-in  
(56 N•cm).  
4
16  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2.6 Wiring  
2.6.1 Electrical Considerations  
Line voltage wiring  
This controller is considered “rack and panel mounted equipment” per EN61010-1,  
Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory  
Use, Part 1: General Requirements. Conformity with 72/23/EEC, the Low Voltage  
Directive requires the user to provide adequate protection against a shock hazard. The  
user shall install this controller in an enclosure that limits OPERATOR access to the rear  
terminals.  
Mains Power Supply  
This equipment is suitable for connection to 90 to 264 Vac or to 24 Vac/dc 50/60 Hz,  
power supply mains. It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and non-time delay  
(North America), quick-acting, high breaking capacity, Type F (Europe), 1/2A, 250V  
fuse(s), or circuit-breaker for 90-264 Vac applications; or 1 A, 125 V fuse or circuit  
breaker for 24 Vac/dc applications, as part of the installation. The switch or circuit-  
breaker shall be located in close proximity to the controller, within easy reach of the  
OPERATOR. The switch or circuit-breaker shall be marked as the disconnecting device  
for the controller.  
CAUTION  
Applying 90-264 Vac to an instrument rated for 24 Vac/dc will severely  
damage the instrument and is a fire and smoke hazard.  
When applying power to multiple instruments, make certain that sufficient current is  
supplied. Otherwise, the instruments may not start up normally due to the voltage drop  
caused by the in-rush current.  
Controller Grounding  
PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the enclosure in which it is  
installed shall be in accordance with National and Local electrical codes. To minimize  
electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the system, supplementary  
bonding of the controller enclosure to a local ground, using a No. 12 (4 mm2) copper  
conductor, is recommended.  
Control/Alarm Circuit Wiring  
The insulation of wires connected to the Control/Alarm terminals shall be rated for the  
highest voltage involved. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring (input, current output, and  
low voltage Control/Alarm circuits) shall be separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30  
Vac, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc) wiring per Permissible Wiring Bundling, Table 2-5.  
Electrical Noise Precautions  
Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce undesirable  
effects in measurements and control circuits.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise. Your controller  
has built-in circuits to reduce the effect of electrical noise from various sources. If there  
is a need to further reduce these effects:  
• Separate External Wiring—Separate connecting wires into bundles  
(See Permissible Wiring Bundling - Table 2-5) and route the individual bundles  
through separate conduit metal trays.  
Use Suppression Devices—For additional noise protection, you may want to add  
suppression devices at the external source. Appropriate suppression devices are  
commercially available.  
ATTENTION  
For additional noise information, refer to document number 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital  
Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments.  
Permissible Wiring Bundling  
Table 2-5 Permissible Wiring Bundling  
Bundle No.  
1
Wire Functions  
• Line power wiring  
• Earth ground wiring  
• Line voltage control relay output wiring  
• Line voltage alarm wiring  
2
3
Analog signal wire, such as:  
• Input signal wire (thermocouple, 4 to 20 mA, etc.)  
• 4-20 mA output signal wiring  
Digital input signals  
• Low voltage alarm relay output wiring  
• Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits  
• Low voltage wiring to open collector type control circuits  
18  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2.7 Wiring Diagrams  
Identify Your Wiring Requirements  
To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your controller, refer to the model  
number interpretation in this section. The model number of the controller is on the  
outside of the case.  
Universal Output Functionality and Restrictions  
Instruments with multiple outputs can be configured to perform a variety of output types  
and alarms. For example, an instrument with one current output and two relays can be  
configured to provide any one of the following:  
1) Current Simplex with two alarm relays  
2) Current Duplex 100% with two alarm relays  
3) Time Simplex with one alarm relay  
4) Time Duplex with no alarm relays  
5) Three Position Step Control with no alarm relays  
These selections may all be made via the keyboard and by wiring to the appropriate  
output terminals; there are no internal jumpers or switches to change. This flexibility  
allows a customer to stock a single instrument which is able to handle a variety of  
applications.  
Table 2-6 shows what control types and alarms are available based upon the installed  
outputs. In this table, when Duplex Control and Reverse Action are configured:  
Output 1 is HEAT and Output 2 is COOL.  
In Table 2-6 when Three Position Step Control is configured:  
Output 1 is OPEN and Output 2 is CLOSE.  
In Table 2-6 the Output 1/2 option Single Relay can be any of the following selections:  
Electro-Mechanical Relay, Solid-State Relay or Open Collector Output.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Table 2-6 Universal Output Functionality and Restrictions  
Output Algorithm  
Type  
Output 1/2  
Option  
Function of  
Output 1/2  
Function of Other Outputs  
Output #3  
Output #4  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Output 1  
Alarm 1  
Auxiliary Output  
Time Simplex  
Single Relay  
Current Output  
Dual Relay  
Output 1  
INU  
Alarm 2  
Output 1  
Alarm 2  
Output 2  
Output 2  
Alarm 2  
Not Needed  
Not Needed  
Not Needed  
Not Needed  
Not Needed  
Not Needed  
Output 1  
Output 1  
INU  
Time Duplex or  
TPSC  
Single Relay  
Current Output  
Dual Relay  
Outputs 1 and  
2
Current Simplex  
Single Relay  
Current Output  
Dual Relay  
INU  
Output 1  
INU  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Output 1  
Not Needed  
Output 1  
Current Dup. 100% Single Relay  
Current = COOL  
and HEAT  
INU  
Outputs 1 and 2  
Not Needed  
Current Output Outputs 1 and  
2
Dual Relay  
INU  
N/A  
Alarm 2  
N/A  
Alarm 1  
N/A  
Outputs 1 and 2  
N/A  
Current Duplex  
50%  
Current = HEAT  
Aux Out = COOL  
Single Relay  
Current Output  
Dual Relay  
Output 1  
N/A  
Alarm 2  
N/A  
Alarm 1  
N/A  
Output 2  
N/A  
Current/Time  
Current = COOL  
Time = HEAT  
Single Relay *  
Current Output  
Dual Relay *  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Output 2  
Output 2  
Alarm 2  
Output 2  
Output 2  
Alarm 2  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Alarm 1  
Output 2  
Not Needed  
Output 2  
Outputs 1 & 2  
Output 1  
Time/Current  
Time = COOL  
Current = HEAT  
Single Relay *  
Current Output  
Dual Relay *  
Output 1  
Output 1  
Not Needed  
Output 1  
Outputs 1 & 2  
TPSC = Three Position Step Control  
N/A = Not Available – This output algorithm type cannot be performed with this Output 1/2  
option.  
INU = Installed, Not Used – The installed Output 1/2 option is not used for the configured  
output algorithm type.  
Not Needed = Auxiliary Output is Not Needed to provide the desired output algorithm and can  
be used for another purpose. With the proper configuration, Auxiliary Output  
could also be used as a substitute for the Current Output  
* To obtain this output algorithm type with these Output 1/2 Options: 1) Configure the  
OUTALG selection as “TIME D”; 2) Configure Auxiliary Output for “OUTPUT” and; 3)  
Scale the Auxiliary Output as necessary for the desired output algorithm type. For these  
20  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
selections, the Output 1 (HEAT) and Output 2 (COOL) signals will be present both on the  
Auxiliary Output and on the two relays normally used for Time Duplex.  
Wiring the Controller  
Using the information contained in the model number, select the appropriate wiring  
diagrams from the composite wiring diagram below. Refer to the individual diagrams  
listed to wire the controller according to your requirements.  
7
19  
20  
21  
22  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
1
2
4
5
6
L1  
L2/N  
4
5
6
7
8
9
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
3
17  
18  
8
See table for callout details  
Figure 2-4 Composite Wiring Diagram  
Details  
Callout  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AC/DC Line Voltage Terminals. See Figure 2-5.  
Output 3 Terminals. See Figure 2-8 through Figure 2-14.  
Output 4 Terminals. See Figure 2-8 through Figure 2-14.  
Outputs 1 and 2 Terminals. See Figure 2-8 through Figure 2-14.  
Input #2 Terminals. See Figure 2-7.  
Input #1 Terminals. See Figure 2-6.  
Aux. Output and Digital Inputs Terminals. See Figure 2-17.  
Communications Terminals. See Figure 2-15 and Figure 2-16.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Earth  
Ground  
1
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
3
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
2
Hot  
AC/DC  
Line  
Voltage  
L1  
Neutral  
L2/N  
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the enclosure in which it is  
installed, shall be in accordance with National and local electrical codes. To minimize  
electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the system, supplementary  
bonding of the controller enclosure to local ground using a No. 12 (4 mm2) copper  
conductor is recommended. Before powering the controller, see “Prelimnary Checks”  
in this section of the Product Manual.  
2
3
It is the user’s responsibility to provide a switch and non-time delay (North America),  
quick-acting, high breaking capacity, Type F (Europe), 1/2A, 250V fuse(s), or circuit-  
breaker for 90-264 Vac applications; or 1 A, 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac/dc  
applications, as part of the installation.  
CAUTION Applying 90-264 Vac to an instrument rated for 24 Vac/dc will severely  
damage the instrument and is a fire and smoke hazard.  
Figure 2-5 Mains Power Supply  
22  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Input #1  
Millivolt or Volts  
except 0-10 Volts  
Thermocouple  
RTD  
Use Thermocouple  
extension wire only  
25 R  
25 R  
26 +  
25 R  
26 +  
3
mV or  
Volt  
+
–
+
26  
source  
–
27  
27  
–
27 –  
0-10 Volts  
+
Milliamps  
–
Thermocouple Differential  
Use Thermocouple  
extension wire only  
25 R  
26 +  
25 R  
26  
25 R  
1
+
100K  
0–10  
Xmitter  
1
2
Volt  
source  
+
4
2
+
1
26  
+
250 Ω  
–
–
+
Power  
100K  
3
–
27  
–
27 –  
27 –  
+
–
Supply  
1
2
The 250 ohm resistor for milliamp inputs or the voltage divider for 0-10 Volt inputs are supplied  
with the controller when those inputs are specified. These items must be installed prior to start  
up when the controller is wired. For 0-20 mA applications, the resistor should be located at the  
transmitter terminals if Burnout detection is desired.  
Splice and tape this junction between the two thermocouples. This junction may be located  
anywhere between the thermocouples and the instrument terminals, it does not need to be close  
to the other thermocouple junctions. Both thermocouples must be of the same type. For best  
accuracy, the two thermocouples should be matched or, preferably, made from the same batch  
of wire.  
This controller does not produce a steady current for burnout detection. For that reason, when a  
thermocouple is used in parallel with another instrument, it may be desirable to configure the  
burnout selection for this controller to “NOFS” and use the burnout current from the other  
instrument to also drive this controller.  
3
4
The millivolt values for the Thermocouple Differential Input are for a pair of J thermocouples at  
an ambient temperature mean of 450°F / 232°C.  
Figure 2-6 Input 1 Connections  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Input #2  
Volts Input  
Milliamps Input  
–
1
Voltage  
source  
22 mA+  
23 V+  
22 mA+  
Xmitter  
+
+
23 V+  
24 –  
Power  
+
–
–
24 –  
Supply  
1
The dropping resistor for milliamp inputs is internal to the controller.  
Figure 2-7 Input 2 Connections  
Time Simplex  
19  
N.C.  
Output  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
20  
Relay Load  
L1  
N.O.  
To terminal  
19 or 21  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
L2/N  
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm  
Relay#2  
Relay Load  
N.O.  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
2
2
N.C.  
N.O.  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
Time Duplex  
19  
N.C.  
Load  
Output  
Relay#1  
Relay Load  
20  
Supply  
L1  
N.O.  
To terminal  
19 or 21  
Power  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
L2/N  
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.  
Output  
Relay#2  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
N.O.  
1
To terminal  
4 or 6  
2
2
N.C.  
N.O.  
Alarm  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
Relay#1  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
1
2
Alarm #2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control unless the Dual Relay Option is used.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Figure 2-8 Electromechanical Relay Output  
See Table 2-6 for relay terminal connections for other Output Algorithm Types.  
24  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Time Simplex  
1
Dummy Resistor  
Relay Load  
2
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
Output  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
L1  
N.O.  
L2/N  
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C. Alarm  
Relay#2  
N.O.  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
3
3
N.C. Alarm  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay#1  
Relay Load  
N.O.  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
Time Duplex  
1
Dummy Resistor  
Relay Load  
2
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
Output  
Relay#1  
Load  
L1  
N.O.  
Supply  
Power  
1
L2/N  
Dummy Resistor  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Output  
Relay#2  
N.O.  
Load  
Supply  
Relay Load  
Power  
2
3
N.C. Alarm  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
N.O.  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
If the load current is less than the minimum rated value of 20 mA, then there may be residual voltage across both  
ends of the load even if the relay is turned off. Use a dummy resistor as shown to counteract this. The total  
current through the resistor and the the load must exceed 20 mA. Solid State Relays are zero-crossing type.  
1
Solid State relays are rated at 1 Amp at 25°C and derated linearly to 0.5 Amp at 55°C. Customer should size  
fuse accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
2
3
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Figure 2-9 Solid State Relay Output  
See Table 2-6 for relay terminal connections for other Output Algorithm Types.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Time Simplex  
Customer Supplied  
Electromechanical relay  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
+
+
L1  
+
–
Output #1  
L2/N  
1
–
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C. Alarm  
Relay#2  
N.O.  
Customer Supplied  
Solid-State relay  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
3
3
N.C. Alarm  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay#1  
Relay Load  
N.O.  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
Time Duplex  
Customer Supplied  
Electromechanical relay  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
+
+
+
–
L1  
Output #1  
1
–
Customer Supplied  
Electromechanical relay  
L2/N  
–
Customer Supplied  
Solid-State relay  
4
5
6
7
8
9
+
+
+
–
Output #2  
–
1
2
–
Customer Supplied  
Solid-State relay  
N.C. Alarm  
Relay#1  
N.O.  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
3
Open collector outputs are internally powered at +30 Vdc. Connecting an external  
power supply will damage the controller.  
1
CAUTION  
2
3
Alarm #2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control unless the Dual Relay option is used.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Figure 2-10 Open Collector Output  
See Table 2-6 for relay terminal connections for other Output Algorithm Types.  
26  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Time Duplex with a Dual Relay Board  
Cool Relay Load  
19  
Out Relay#2  
Out Relay#1  
Load  
N.O.  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
L1  
Supply  
Power  
N.O.  
Heat Relay Load  
L2/N  
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.  
N.O.  
Alarm  
Relay#2  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
2
2
N.C.  
N.O.  
Alarm  
Relay#1  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
7 or 9  
Dual Electromechanical relays are rated at 2 Amps @120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc. Customer should size  
fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
1
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
2
Figure 2-11 Dual Electromechanical Relay Option Output  
See Table 2-6 for relay terminal connections for other Output Algorithm Types.  
+
19  
Current Output  
4–20 mA  
Controller Load  
0-1000 ohms  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
L1  
L2/N  
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.C.  
N.O.  
Alarm  
Relay#2  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
To terminal  
4 or 6  
2
N.C. Alarm  
Relay#1  
N.O.  
Load  
Supply  
Power  
Relay Load  
1
To terminal  
7 or 9  
2
1
2
When the instrument has the Current Output as shown, no Alarms are available when using the Time Proportional Duplex or  
Three Position Step Control Output Algorithms, as these outputs require both available relays.  
Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac or 30 Vdc.  
Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Figure 2-12 Current Output  
See Table 2-6 for relay terminal connections for other Output Algorithm Types.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Open (CW)  
20  
L2/N  
Motor  
Close (CCW)  
21  
Control Relay #1  
2
5
6
Power  
Supply  
1
L1/Hot  
Control Relay #2  
1
2
Alarm #2 is not available with this configuration.  
Electromechanical Relays are rated at 5 amps at 120 Vac or 240 Vac  
or 24 Vdc. Solid State Relays are rated at 1 Amp at 25°C and  
derated linearly to 0.5 Amps at 55°C. Customer should size fuses  
accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Figure 2-13 Three Position Step Control Connections w/o Dual Relay  
Option  
Close (CCW)  
Control  
Relay #2  
19  
20  
21  
Control  
L2/N  
Relay #1  
Motor  
Power  
Supply  
Open (CW)  
2
L1/Hot  
Alarm #2 is available with with this configuration.  
1
2
Dual Electromechanical relays are rated at 2 Amps @120 Vac or 240 Vac or  
30 Vdc. Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.  
Figure 2-14 Three Position Step Control Connections with Dual Relay  
Option  
28  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
COMMUNICATION MASTER  
D+ (B) SHLD D– (A)  
1
2
16 SHLD  
SHLD  
D+  
17 D+ (B)  
18 D– (A)  
D–  
120 OHMS  
Connect shield  
to ground at one  
end only.  
TO OTHER  
COMMUNICATION  
CONTROLLERS  
D–  
D+  
120 OHMS ON LAST LEG  
Do not run the communications lines in the same conduit as AC power.  
Use shielded twisted pair cables (Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent).  
1
2
Figure 2-15 RS-422/485 Communications Option Connections  
COMMUNICATION MASTER  
3
OR SWITCH  
SHLD TXD–TXD+ RXD–  
RXD  
+
1
14SHLD
15 RXD +  
2
–
16 RXD  
17TXD+
–
18TXD
Do not run the communications lines in the same conduit as AC  
power. Correct connections may require the use of an Ethernet  
cross-over cable.  
1
Use Shielded twisted-pair, Category 5 (STP CAT5) Ethernet cable.  
Use Switch rather than Hub to maximize performance.  
2
3
Figure 2-16 Ethernet Communications Option Connections  
Figure 2-16 and Table 2-7 shows how to connect a UDC to a MDI Compliant Hub or  
Switch utilizing a straight-through cable or for connecting a UDC to a PC utilizing a  
crossover cable.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Table 2-7 Terminals for connecting a UDC to a MDI Compliant Hub or Switch  
UDC Terminal UDC Signal Name  
RJ45 Socket Pin #  
Switch Signal  
Name  
Position 14  
Position 15  
Position 16  
Position 17  
Position 18  
Shield  
RXD-  
RXD+  
TXD-  
TXD+  
Shield  
Shield  
TXD-  
TXD+  
RXD-  
RXD+  
6
3
2
1
Table 2-8 shows how to connect a UDC directly to a PC utilizing a straight-through cable  
(wiring the UDC cable this way makes the necessary cross-over connections)  
Table 2-8 Terminals for connecting a UDC directly to a PC utilizing a straight-  
through cable  
UDC Terminal UDC Signal Name  
RJ45 Socket Pin #  
PC Signal Name  
Shield  
Position 14  
Position 15  
Position 16  
Position 17  
Position 18  
Shield  
RXD-  
RXD+  
TXD-  
TXD+  
Shield  
2
1
6
3
TXD-  
TXD+  
RXD-  
RXD+  
1
1
Auxiliary Output  
Digital Inputs  
+
+
_
Auxiliary  
Load  
0 - 1000 Ω  
Digital  
Input #1  
10  
11  
12  
13  
_
+
_
12  
13  
Digital  
Input #2  
Connect shield  
to ground at one  
end only.  
Connect shield  
to ground at one  
end only.  
Auxiliary Output and Digital Input 2 are mutually exclusive.  
1
Figure 2-17 Auxiliary Output and Digital Inputs Option Connections  
30  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
2 Wire Transmitter  
Configure:  
A2S1TY = NONE  
A2S2TY = NONE  
1
_
+
5 +  
6 -  
26 +  
27 -  
250 Ω  
OUTPUT 3  
INPUT 1  
If necessary, install a zener diode here to reduce voltage at the  
transmitter. A 1N4733 will reduce the voltage at the transmitter to  
approximately 25 Vdc.  
1
Figure 2-18 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA — 2 wire Transmitter Using Open  
Collector Alarm 2 Output  
2 Wire Transmitter  
Configure:  
AUXOUT = OUT  
Auxiliary Output Calibration  
ZEROVAL = 4095  
1
_
+
SPANVAL = 4095  
12 +  
13 -  
26 +  
27 -  
250 Ω  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT  
INPUT 1  
If necessary, install a zener diode here to reduce voltage at the  
transmitter. A 1N4733 will reduce the voltage at the transmitter to  
approximately 25 Vdc.  
1
Figure 2-19 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA — 2 Wire Transmitter  
Using Auxiliary Output  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
3 Configuration  
3.1 Overview  
Introduction  
Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward keystroke  
sequences to select and establish (configure) pertinent control data best suited for your  
application.  
To assist you in the configuration process, there are prompts that appear in the upper and  
lower displays. These prompts let you know what group of configuration data (Set Up  
prompts) you are working with and also, the specific parameters (Function prompts)  
associated with each group.  
Table 3-1 shows an overview of the prompt hierarchy as it appears in the controller.  
What’s in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
Table 3-1 Configuration Topics  
TOPIC  
See Page  
32  
3.1 Overview  
3.2 Configuration Prompt Hierarchy  
3.3 Configuration Procedure  
3.4 Tuning Set Up Group  
33  
34  
35  
3.5 SP Ramp Set Up Group  
3.6 Accutune Set Up Group  
3.7 Algorithm Set Up Group  
3.8 Output Set Up Group  
38  
43  
46  
51  
3.9 Input 1 Set Up Group  
55  
3.10 Input 2 Set Up Group  
59  
3.11 Control Set Up Group  
61  
3.12 Options Set Up Group  
67  
3.13 Communications Set Up Group  
3.14 Alarms Set Up Group  
73  
76  
3.15 Display Set Up Group  
82  
3.16 P.I.E. Tool Ethernet and Email Configuration Screens  
3.17 Configuration Record Sheet  
84  
87  
32  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
3.2 Configuration Prompt Hierarchy  
Table 3-2 Configuration Prompt Hierarchy  
Function Prompts  
Set Up Group  
TUNING  
PB or  
GAIN  
RATE T  
I MIN or  
I RPM  
MANRST  
PB 2 or  
GAIN 2  
RATE2T  
I2 MIN or  
I2 RPM  
CYC T1  
or  
CT1 X3  
CYC2T2  
or  
SECUR  
LOCK  
AUTOMA  
RN HLD  
SP SL  
CT2 X3  
SPRAMP  
ENDSEG  
SGx RP*  
TI MIN  
RPUNIT  
SGxSP*  
FINLSP  
RECYCL  
SGx TI*  
SPRATE  
SOKDEV  
EUHRUP  
PG END  
EUHRDN  
STATE  
SPPROG  
ToBEGN  
STRSEG  
PVSTRT  
SPRAMP  
* x = 1 to 12. Program concludes after segment 12  
AT ERR  
FUZZY  
CTRALG  
OUTALG  
TUNE  
TIMER  
DUPLEX  
PERIOD  
CRANGE  
IN1 HI  
ATUNE  
ALGOR  
OUTALG  
INPUT1  
START  
RLY TYP  
IN1 LO  
L DISP  
RESET  
INCRMT  
OUTRNG  
XMITR1  
IN1TYP  
EMISS  
RATIO1  
RATIO2  
BIAS 1  
BIAS 2  
FILTR1  
FILTR2  
BRNOUT  
IN2TYP  
XMITR2  
IN2 HI  
IN2 LO  
INPUT2  
PIDSET  
SP Lo  
SW VAL  
ACTION  
MINRPM  
LSP’S  
RSP SRC  
OUT Lo  
SP TRK  
D BAND  
PWR UP  
HYST  
PWROUT  
FAILSF  
SP Hi  
CONTRL  
OUT Hi  
FSMODE  
PBorGN  
AUXOUT  
0 PCT  
100 PCT  
CRANGE  
DIG IN1  
DI1 CMB  
DIG IN2  
DI2 CMB  
TXDLY  
OPTIONS  
COM  
ComADD  
SDMODE  
ComSTA  
SHD_SP  
IRENAB  
UNITS  
BAUD  
SDENAB  
CSP_BI  
SHDTIM  
WS_FLT  
CSRATO  
LOOPBK  
A1S1TY  
A2S1TY  
ALHYST  
A1S1VA  
A2S1VA  
ALARM1  
A1S1HL  
A2S1HL  
BLOCK  
A1S1EV  
A2S1EV  
DIAGAL  
A1S2TY  
A2S2TY  
A1S2VA  
A2S2VA  
A1S2HL  
A2S2HL  
A1S2EV  
A2S2EV  
ALARMS  
DECMAL  
VERSON  
UNITS  
FREQ  
LWRDSP  
LNGUAG  
TCDIAG  
DISPLY  
FAILSF  
TESTS  
STATUS  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
3.3 Configuration Procedure  
Introduction  
Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre-configured at the factory.  
The factory settings are shown in Table 3-4 through Table 3-15 that follow this  
procedure.  
If you want to change any of these selections or values, follow the procedure in Table  
3-3. This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to any Set Up group and any  
associated Function parameter prompt.  
Procedure  
ATTENTION  
The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2/3 seconds when the SET UP or FUNCTION key is held in.  
Also,  
or  
keys will move group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast.  
Table 3-3 Configuration Procedure  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Enter Set Up  
Mode  
Upper Display = SET  
Setup  
Lower Display = TUNING (This is the first Set Up Group  
title)  
Select any Set  
Up Group  
Sequentially displays the other Set Up group titles shown in  
the prompt hierarchy in Table 3-2 Configuration Prompt  
Hierarchy.  
2
Setup  
You can also use the  
or  
keys to scan the Set Up  
groups in both directions. Stop at the Set Up group title that  
describes the group of parameters you want to configure.  
Then proceed to the next step.  
Select a Function  
Parameter  
Upper Display = the current value or selection for the first  
function prompt of the selected Set Up  
group.  
3
Function  
Lower Display = the first Function prompt within that Set Up  
group.  
Sequentially displays the other function prompts of the Set  
Up group you have selected. Stop at the function prompt  
that you want to change, then proceed to the next step.  
Change the  
Value or  
Selection  
Increments or decrements the value or selection that  
appears for the selected function prompt. If you change the  
value or selection of a parameter while in Set Up mode then  
decide not to enter it, press M-A RESET once—the original  
value or selection is recalled.  
4
or  
Enter the Value  
or Selection  
Enters value or selection made into memory after another  
key is pressed.  
5
6
Function  
Exit Configuration  
Exits configuration mode and returns controller to the same  
state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up  
mode. It stores any changes you have made.  
Lower  
Display  
If you do not press any keys for 30 seconds, the controller  
times out and reverts to the mode and display used prior to  
entry into Set Up mode.  
34  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
3.4 Tuning Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for the tuning constants you are  
using so that your controller responds correctly to changes in process variable and  
setpoint. You can start with predetermined values but you will have to watch the system  
to see how to modify them. The Accutune feature automatically selects Gain, Rate, and  
Reset on demand.  
ATTENTION  
Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and lockout, we recommend  
that you configure this group last, after all other configuration data has been loaded.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-4 TUNING Group (Numeric Code 100) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
PROPORTIONAL BAND (simplex) is the  
percent of the range of the measured  
variable for which a proportional controller  
will produce a 100 % change in its output.  
PB = 0.1 to 1000 %  
Gain = 0.01 to  
1000  
PB or GAIN 101  
GAIN is the ratio of output change (%) over  
the measured variable change (%) that  
caused it.  
100%  
PB%  
G =  
where PB is the proportional band (in %)  
If the PB is 20 %, then the Gain is 5. And, at  
those settings, a 3 % change in the error  
signal (SP-PV) will result in a 15 % change in  
the controller's output due to proportional  
action. If the Gain is 2, then the PB is 50 %.  
Also defined as "HEAT" Gain on Duplex  
models for variations of Heat/Cool  
applications.  
The selection of Proportional Band or Gain is  
made in the CONTROL parameter group  
under prompt PBorGAIN.  
RATE action, in minutes, affects the  
controller's output whenever the deviation is  
changing; and affects it more when the  
deviation is changing faster.  
0.00 to 10.00  
minutes  
0.08 or less = OFF  
RATE T  
102  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
Also defined as "HEAT" Rate on Duplex  
models for variations of Heat/Cool  
applications.  
I MIN = Reset in Minutes per Repeat  
0.02 to 50.00  
0.02 to 50.00  
I MIN  
or  
I RPM  
103  
I RPM = Reset in Repeats per Minute  
Integral Time (or Reset) adjusts the  
controller's output in accordance with both  
the size of the deviation (SP–PV) and the  
time that it lasts. The amount of the  
corrective action depends on the value of  
Gain. The Reset adjustment is measured as  
how many times proportional action is  
repeated per minute or how many minutes  
before one repeat of the proportional action  
occurs.  
Used with control algorithm PID-A or PID-B.  
Also defined as "HEAT" Reset on Duplex  
models for variations of Heat/Cool  
applications.  
ATTENTION The selection of whether  
Minutes per Repeat or Repeats per Minute is  
used is made in the CONTRL parameters  
group under the prompt MINorRPM.  
MANUAL RESET is only applicable if you  
use control algorithm PD WITH MANUAL  
RESET in the Algorithm Set Up group.  
Because a proportional controller will not  
necessarily line out at setpoint, there will be  
a deviation (offset) from setpoint. This  
eliminates the offset and lets the PV line out  
at setpoint.  
-100 to 100 %  
Output  
MANRST  
104  
ATTENTION Bias is shown on the lower  
display.  
PROPORTIONAL BAND 2 or GAIN 2,  
RATE 2, and RESET 2 parameters are the  
same as previously described for “Heat”  
except that they refer to the cool zone tuning  
constants on duplex models or the second  
set of PID constants, whichever is pertinent.  
PB = 0.1 to 1000 %  
Gain = 0.01 to  
1000  
PB 2 or  
GAIN 2  
105  
106  
This is the same as above except that it  
applies to Duplex models for the "COOL"  
zone of Heat/Cool applications or for the  
second set of PID constants.  
0.00 to 10.00  
minutes  
0.08 or less = OFF  
RATE2T  
36  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
These are the same as above except that  
they apply to Duplex models for the "COOL"  
zone of Heat/Cool applications or for the  
second set of PID constants.  
0.02 to 50.00  
0.02 to 50.00  
I2 MIN  
or  
I2 RPM  
107  
CYCLE TIME (HEAT) determines the length  
of one time proportional output relay cycle.  
Defined as "HEAT" cycle time for Heat/Cool  
applications.  
1 to 120  
CYC T1 or  
CT1 X3  
108  
CYC T1—Electromechanical relays  
CT1 X3—Solid state relays  
ATTENTION Cycle times are in either  
second or 1/3-second increments depending  
upon the configuration of RLYTYP in the  
Output Algorithm Set Up group.  
CYCLE TIME 2 (COOL) is the same as  
above except it applies to Duplex models as  
the cycle time in the "COOL" zone of  
Heat/Cool applications or for the second set  
of PID constants.  
1 to 120  
CYC2T2 or 109  
CT2 X3  
CYC2T2—Electromechanical relays  
CT2 X3—Solid state relays  
ATTENTION Cycle times are in either  
second or 1/3-second increments depending  
upon the configuration of RLYTYP in the  
Output Algorithm Set Up group.  
SECURITY CODE—The level of keyboard  
lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode.  
Knowledge of a security code may be  
required to change from one level to another.  
This configuration should be copied and kept  
in a secure location.  
0 to 9999  
SECUR  
110  
NOTE: The Security Code is for keyboard  
entry only and is not available via  
communications.  
ATTENTION Can only be changed if  
LOCK selection is NONE.  
LOCKOUT applies to one of the functional  
groups: Configuration, Calibration, Tuning,  
Accutune. DO NOT CONFIGURE UNTIL  
ALL CONFIGURATION IS COMPLETE.  
LOCK  
111  
NONE—No lockout; all groups are  
NONE  
0
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
read/write.  
CALIBRATION—All groups are available for  
read/write except for the Calibration and  
Keyboard Lockout groups.  
CAL  
1
2
+ CONFIGURATION—Tuning, SP Ramp,  
and Accutune groups are read/write. All  
other groups are read only. Calibration and  
Keyboard Lockout groups are not available.  
CONF  
+ VIEW—Tuning and Setpoint Ramp  
parameters are read/write. No other  
parameters are viewable.  
VIEW  
ALL  
3
4
ALL—Tuning and Setpoint Ramp  
parameters are available for read only. No  
other parameters are viewable.  
MANUAL/AUTO KEY LOCKOUT—Allows  
you to disable the Manual/Auto key.  
AUTOMA  
112  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
DISABLE  
ENABLE  
ATTENTION Can only be viewed if  
LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.  
RUN/HOLD KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to  
disable the Run/Hold key, for either SP  
Ramp or SP Program. The Run/Hold key is  
never disabled when used to acknowledge a  
latched alarm 1 or a Diagnostic Message.  
RN HLD  
114  
DISABLE  
ENABLE  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
ATTENTION Can only be viewed if  
LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.  
SETPOINT SELECT KEY LOCKOUT—  
Allows you to disable the Setpoint Select  
key.  
SP SEL  
115  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
DISABLE  
ENABLE  
ATTENTION Can only be viewed if  
LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.  
38  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
3.5 SP Ramp Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Set Point Ramp, Set Point Programs and Set Point Rates can be configured in this group.  
A single Setpoint Ramp [SP RAMP] can be configured to occur between the current local  
setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to 255 minutes.  
A Set Point Rate [SPRATE] lets you configure a specific rate of change for any local  
setpoint change.  
A single Set Point Program [SP PROG] with up to 12 segments can be configured.  
For more information on Set Point Rate, Ramp and Programming, see Sections 4.18  
through 4.21.  
You can start and stop the ramp/program using the RUN/HOLD key.  
PV Hot Start is a configurable feature and means that, at initialization, the setpoint is set  
to the current PV value and the Ramp or Rate or Program then starts from this value.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-5 SPRAMP Group (Numeric Code 200) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeri  
c Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
SP RAMP  
201  
SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP—Make a  
selection to enable or disable the setpoint  
ramp function. Make sure you configure a  
ramp time and a final setpoint value.  
SP Program  
must be  
disabled for  
SP Ramp  
prompts to  
appear  
SP Programming must be disabled.  
DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP—Disables the  
setpoint ramp option.  
ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP—Allows the  
single setpoint ramp prompts to be shown.  
0 to 255 minutes  
TI MIN  
202  
SETPOINT RAMP TIME—Enter the number  
of minutes desired to reach the final setpoint.  
A ramp time of “0” implies an immediate  
change of setpoint.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeri  
c Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
Enter a value within  
the setpoint limits  
FINLSP  
203  
SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT—  
Enter the value desired for the final setpoint.  
The controller will operate at the setpoint set  
here when ramp is ended.  
ATTENTION If the ramp is on HOLD, the  
held setpoint can be changed by the ▲ and ▼  
keys. However, the ramp time remaining and  
original ramp rate is not changed. Therefore,  
when returning to RUN mode, the setpoint  
will ramp at the same rate as previous to the  
local setpoint change and will stop if the final  
setpoint is reached before the time expires. If  
the time expires before the final setpoint is  
reached, it will jump to the final setpoint.  
ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will  
cause the SP portion of Accutune to abort.  
PV Tune will continue to function normally.  
Ramp is placed into HOLD while tuning  
(TUNE configuration).  
SPRATE  
204  
SETPOINT RATE—Lets you configure a  
specific rate of change for any local setpoint  
change.  
SP Rate  
operates only  
when neither  
SP Ramp or  
SP  
Programming  
is running or  
when SP  
DIS  
0
1
DISABLE SETPOINT RATE—Disables the  
setpoint rate option.  
ENAB  
ENABLE SETPOINT RATE—Allows the SP  
rate feature.  
Ramp and SP  
Programming  
are disabled  
0 to 9999 in  
Engineering units  
per hour  
EUHRUP  
205  
RATE UP—Rate up value. When making a  
setpoint change, this is the rate at which the  
controller will change from the original  
setpoint up to the new one. The ramping  
(current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn in  
the lower display.  
Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change  
in Setpoint (i.e., no rate applies).  
40  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeri  
c Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
0 to 9999 in  
Engineering units  
per hour  
EUHRDN  
206  
RATE DOWN—Rate down value. When  
making a setpoint change, this is the rate at  
which the controller will change from the  
original setpoint down to the new one. The  
ramping (current) setpoint can be viewed as  
SPn in the lower display.  
Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change  
in Setpoint (i.e., no rate applies).  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
SPPROG  
(optional  
feature)  
207  
SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAM—  
Available only with controllers that contain  
this option.  
SP Ramp  
must be  
SP RAMP must be disabled.  
DISABLE—Disables setpoint programming.  
ENABLE—Enables setpoint programming.  
disabled for  
SP Program  
prompts to  
appear. If  
SP Rate is  
enabled, it  
does not  
ATTENTION Detailed information for the  
prompts for SP Programming may be found  
in Section 4.21 – Setpoint Programming. The  
listing below is only for reference purposes.  
operate  
while an SP  
Program is  
running.  
1 to 11  
Start Segment Number  
End Segment Number  
STRSEG  
ENDSEG  
208  
209  
2 to 12 (always end in  
a soak segment)  
SOK 2  
SOK 4  
SOK 6  
SOK 8  
SOK 10  
SOK 12  
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
Engineering Units for Ramp Segments  
RPUNIT  
210  
TIME in hours:minutes  
RATE in Enineering units per minute  
RATE in Enineering units per hour  
TIME  
EU-M  
EU-H  
0
1
2
Number of Program Recycles  
Guaranteed Soak Deviation Value  
Program Termination State  
RECYCL  
SOKDEV  
PG END  
211  
212  
213  
0 to 100 recycles  
0 to 100  
LAST (Hold at last  
SP) FSAF (Manual  
mode/failsafe)  
0
1
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeri  
c Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
Program State at Program End  
Reset/Rerun SP Program  
STATE  
214  
DIS  
HOLD  
0
1
ToBEGN  
PVSTRT  
215  
216  
DIS  
0
1
KEY (Keyboard)  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
DISABLE—LSP1 is used as the initial ramp  
setpoint.  
ENABLE—Current PV value is used as the  
initial ramp setpoint.  
SG1 RP  
SG3 RP  
SG5 RP  
SG7 RP  
SG9 RP  
SG11 RP  
217  
220  
223  
226  
229  
232  
0-99hours:0-  
59minutes  
Engineering  
Units/minute or  
Engineering Units  
/hour  
Segment #1 Ramp Time or  
Segment #1 Ramp Rate  
Select TIME, EU-M, or EU-H at prompt  
RPUNIT. All ramps will use the same  
selection.  
Soak Segments Setpoint Value  
SG2 SP  
SG4 SP  
SG6 SP  
SG8 SP  
SG10SP  
SG12SP  
218  
221  
224  
227  
230  
233  
Enter a Value  
within the Setpoint  
Limits  
Soak Segments Duration  
SG2 TI  
SG4 TI  
SG6 TI  
SG8 TI  
SG10TI  
SG12TI  
219  
222  
225  
228  
231  
234  
0-99 Hours:0-59  
Minutes  
42  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.6 Accutune Set Up Group  
Introduction  
Accutune III automatically calculates GAIN, RATE, and RESET TIME (PID) tuning  
constants for your control loop. When initiated on demand, the Accutune algorithm  
measures a process step response and automatically generates the PID tuning constants  
needed for no overshoot on your process.  
Fuzzy, Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression: When enabled, this configuration will suppress or  
eliminate any overshoot that may occur as a result of the existing tuning parameters, as  
the PV approaches the setpoint.  
Tune, Demand Tuning: The tuning process is initiated through the operator interface keys  
or via a digital input (if configured). The algorithm then calculates new tuning parameters  
and enters them in the tuning group. Tune will operate with PIDA, PIDB, PD+MR and  
Three Position Step Control algorithms.  
SP, SP Tuning: SP tuning continuously adjusts the PID parameters in response to  
setpoint changes. You can select tuning on minimum setpoint changes of  
5 % up to 15 % span. Perform SP tuning after you have configured the controller. SP  
Tuning does not operate with the Three Position Step Control algorithm.  
Simplex Tuning is used when a Simplex Control Algorithm is configured and uses the  
current SP value and alters the output over the Output Limit Range.  
Duplex Tuning is used when a Duplex Control Algorithm is configured. To perform a  
Duplex Tune, Two Local Setpoints must be configured per the Control Group in Section  
3.11.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-6 ATUNE Group (Numeric Code 300) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
FUZZY  
301  
FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION—  
Can be enabled or disabled independently of  
whether Demand Tuning or SP Tuning is  
enabled or disabled.  
DISABLE—Disables Fuzzy Overshoot  
Suppression.  
DIS  
0
1
ENABLE—The UDC uses Fuzzy Logic to  
suppress or minimize any overshoot that  
may occur when PV approaches SP. It will  
not recalculate any new tuning parameters.  
ENAB  
TUNE  
302  
ACCUTUNE III  
DISABLE —Disables the Accutune function.  
DIS  
TUNE  
0
1
DEMAND TUNING—If TUNE is selected,  
and tuning is initiated through the operator  
interface or digital input (if configured), the  
algorithm calculates new tuning parameters  
and enters them into the tuning group. This  
tuning requires no process knowledge and  
does not require line out for initialization.  
DUPLEX  
303  
DUPLEX ACCUTUNING III – These prompts  
only appear when a duplex output type has  
been configured.  
MANU  
AUTO  
MANUAL – Tune manually using LSP 1 and  
LSP 2 values. LSP 1 is used to derive tuning  
parameters associated with HEAT (output >  
50 %). LSP 2 is used to derive tuning  
parameters associated with COOL (output <  
50 %).  
AUTOMATIC – Tuning is performed  
automatically on both HEAT and COOL  
sequentially. LSP 1 is used for HEAT tuning  
and LSP 2 is used for COOL tuning. To  
initiate tuning, either LSP 1 or LSP 2 must be  
in use.  
44  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DIS  
DISABLE – The current SetPoint is used to  
derive a single set of blended tuning  
parameters. This tuning is performed over  
the range of the output limits similar to  
Simplex Tuning. The Tuning Parameters  
derived are placed into both the HEAT and  
COOL tune sets (PID 1 and PID 2).  
AT ERR  
(Read Only)  
304  
ACCUTUNE ERROR STATUS—When an  
error is detected in the Accutune process, an  
error prompt will appear  
NONE—No errors occurred during last  
Accutune procedure.  
NONE  
RUN  
0
5
RUNNING—An Accutune process is still  
active checking process gain, even though  
“TUNE” is not lit. It does not affect keyboard  
operation.  
CURRENT ACCUTUNE PROCESS  
ABORTED—Caused by one of the following  
conditions:  
• changing to manual mode  
• digital input detected  
ABRT  
4
6
• in heat region of output but a cool output  
was calculated, or vice versa.  
SP2—LSP2 not configured or a Setpoint  
other than LSP1 or LSP2 is in use.  
SP2  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.7 Algorithm Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various algorithms in the controller and Timer functions.  
The Timer section allows you to configure a time-out period and to select the timer start  
by either the keyboard (RUN/HOLD key) or Alarm 2. An optional digital input can also be  
configured to the start the timer. The timer display is selectable as either “time  
remaining” (see TREM) or “elapsed time” (see ET).  
Alarm 1 is activated at the end of the time-out period. When the timer is enabled, it has  
exclusive control of the alarm 1 relay—any previous alarm 1 configuration is ignored. At  
time-out, the timer is ready to be activated again by whatever action has been configured.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-7 ALGOR Group (Numeric Code 400) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
The CONTROL ALGORITHM lets you select  
the type of control that is best for your  
process.  
CTRALG  
401  
ON/OFF is the simplest control type. The  
output can be either ON (100 %) or OFF (0  
%). The Process Variable (PV) is compared  
with the setpoint (SP) to determine the sign  
of the error (ERROR = PV–SP). The  
ON/OFF algorithm operates on the sign of  
the error signal.  
ONOF  
0
In Direct Acting Control, when the error  
signal is positive, the output is 100 %; and  
when the error signal is negative, the output  
is 0 %. If the control action is reverse, the  
opposite is true. An adjustable overlap  
(Hysteresis Band) is provided between the  
on and off states.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected:  
OUTHYS  
46  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DUPLEX ON/OFF is an extension of this  
algorithm when the output is configured for  
Duplex. It allows the operation of a second  
ON/OFF output. There is a deadband  
between the operating ranges of the two  
inputs and an adjustable overlap (hysteresis)  
of the on and off states of each output. Both  
Deadband and Hysteresis are separately  
adjustable. With no relay action the controller  
will read 50 %.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected:  
OUTHYS and DEADBD  
PID A is normally used for three-mode  
control. This means that the output can be  
adjusted somewhere between 100 % and 0  
%. It applies all three control actions—  
Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative  
(D)—to the error signal.  
PIDA  
1
Proportional (Gain)—Regulates the  
controller’s output in proportion to the error  
signal (the difference between Process  
Variable and Setpoint).  
Integral (Reset)—Regulates the controller’s  
output to the size of the error and the time  
the error has existed. (The amount of  
corrective action depends on the value of  
proportional Gain.)  
Derivative (Rate)—Regulates the  
controller’s output in proportion to the rate of  
change of the error. (The amount of  
corrective action depends on the value of  
proportional Gain.)  
PID B—Unlike the PID A equation, the  
controller gives only an integral response to  
a setpoint change, with no effect on the  
output due to the gain or rate action, and it  
gives full response to PV changes.  
PIDB  
2
Otherwise controller action is as described  
for the PID A equation. See note on PID A.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used  
whenever integral action is not wanted for  
automatic control. The equation is computed  
with no integral contribution. The MANUAL  
RESET, which is operator adjustable, is then  
added to the present output to form the  
controller output.  
PDMR  
3
Switching between manual and automatic  
mode will be bumpless.  
If you select PD with Manual Reset you can  
also configure the following variations:  
• PD (Two Mode) control,  
• P (Single Mode) control.  
• Set Rate (D) to 0.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected:  
MANRST in the Tuning Set Up group  
THREE POSITION STEP CONTROL  
(TPSC)—The Three Position Step Control  
algorithm allows the control of a valve (or  
other actuator) with an electric motor driven  
by two controller relay outputs; one to move  
the motor upscale, the other downscale  
without a feedback slidewire linked to the  
motor shaft. The deadband is adjustable in  
the same manner as the duplex output  
algorithm.  
TPSC  
4
The Three Position Step Control algorithm  
provides an output display (OUT) which is an  
estimated motor position, since the motor is  
not using any slidewire feedback. Although  
this output indication is only an  
approximation, it is “corrected” each time the  
controller drives the motor to one of its stops  
(0 % or 100 %). It avoids all the control  
problems associated with the feedback  
slidewire (wear, dirt, noise). When operating  
in this algorithm, the estimated OUT display  
is shown to the nearest percent (i.e., no  
decimal).  
Refer to the Operation section for motor  
position displays.  
As a customer configurable option, when a  
second input board is installed, the motor  
slidewire can be connected to the controller.  
48  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
The actual slidewire position is then shown  
on the lower display as POS. This value is  
used for display only. It is NOT used in  
the Three Position Step algorithm. To  
configure this option, set Input 2 actuation to  
SLIDEW. Calibrate the slidewire.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected:  
DEADBD  
NONE  
5
This configuration is usually used for  
Indicator applications. For this configuration,  
the PV value is percent of range becomes  
the control output value which is used by any  
configured control output type. When  
configured, the upper display shows the PV  
while the lower display is blank unless more  
than one analog input is configured, in which  
case the lower display shows the other  
analog inputs.  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
TIMER allows you to enable or disable the  
timer option.  
TIMER  
402  
The timer option allows you to configure a  
timeout period and to select timer start by  
either the keyboard (RUN/HOLD key) or  
Alarm 2. A digital input can also be  
configured to start the timer.  
When the timer is enabled, it has exclusive  
control of the alarm 1 relay; any previous  
alarm configuration is ignored. At timeout,  
the timer is ready to be re-activated by  
whatever action has been configured. Alarm  
1 is activated at the end of the timeout  
period.  
PERIOD allows you to configure the length  
of timeout period (from 0 to 99 hours:59  
minutes).  
0:00 to 99:59  
PERIOD  
START  
403  
404  
Select length of  
time in Hours and  
Minutes, or minutes  
and seconds.  
START allows you to select whether the  
timer starts with the keyboard (Run/Hold key)  
or Alarm 2.  
KEY  
AL2  
0
1
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
L DISP allows you to select whether time  
remaining (TI REM) or elapsed time (E  
TIME) is displayed for the timer option.  
TREM  
ET  
0
1
L DISP  
405  
The time is shown on the lower display in  
HH:MM format along with a rotating “clock”  
character.  
• If the “clock” rotation is clockwise, elapsed  
time is indicated.  
• If the “clock” rotation is counterclockwise,  
time remaining is indicated.  
RESET TIMER determines how the Timer  
will be set back to zero.  
RESET  
406  
407  
Key  
AL1  
0
1
KEY – Reset Timer via Run/Hold Key  
ALARM 1 – Reset the Timer via either Alarm  
1 or Run/Hold Key  
INCREMENT This selection determines how  
the timer’s count will increment.  
INCRMT  
MIN  
SEC  
0
1
MINUTES Counts are in Hours/Minutes  
SEC Counts are in Minutes/Seconds  
50  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.8 Output Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This group deals with various output types in the controller, the Digital Output Status and  
the Current Output operation.  
ATTENTION The Tuning Group is automatically configured to have two PID sets  
when a Duplex Control Algorithm is selected.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-8 OUTPUT Group (Numeric Code 500) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select  
the type of output you want. Not applicable  
with Control algorithm prompt TPSC  
(Three Position Step Control).  
OUTALG  
501  
Selections are hardware dependent. For  
example, if the controller does not have a  
current output, then none of the prompts for  
Output Algorithms that need a current output  
will appear. Likewise, if the controller does  
not have a relay output, then none of the  
prompts that need a relay output will appear.  
ATTENTION For all Duplex Output forms,  
PID heat parameters apply for controller  
output greater than 50 %; PID cool  
parameters apply for controller output less  
than 50 %.  
TIME SIMPLEX—This output algorithm uses  
Digital Output 1 for Time Proportional  
Control. The output is updated per the Loop  
sampling rate selection. Time Proportional  
Output has a resolution of 4.44 msec. Cycle  
Time is adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds.  
RLY  
0
1
TIME SIMPLEX—This output algorithm uses  
Digital Output 2 for Time Proportional  
RLY2  
Control. The output is updated per the Loop  
sampling rate selection. Time Proportional  
Output has a resolution of 4.44 msec. Cycle  
Time is adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
CURRENT SIMPLEX—Type of output using  
one 4 mA to 20 mA signal that can be fed  
into a positive or negative grounded load of 0  
to 1000 ohms. This signal can easily be  
configured for 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA operation  
via the CRANGE configuration, below.  
CUR  
2
3
TIME DUPLEX—This output algorithm uses  
Digital Outputs 1 and 2 for Duplex Time  
Proportional Control. The outputs are  
updated per the Loop sampling rate  
RLYD  
selection. Time Proportional Output has a  
resolution of 4.44 msec. Cycle Time is  
adjustable from 1 second to 120 seconds.  
CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to current  
simplex but uses a second current output.  
The second output is usually scaled so that  
zero and span correspond with 0 % and  
50 % output (cool zone). When the output is  
0 % to 50 %, the controller uses tuning  
parameter set #2, when the output is 50 % to  
100 % it uses set #1.  
CURD  
4
ATTENTION Other prompts affected: 4-20  
RNG  
CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX is a variation of  
duplex with current active for 0 % to 50 %  
output (tuning set 2) and time is active 50 %  
to 100 % output (tuning set 1).  
CURT  
TCUR  
5
6
Relay controls heat, current controls cool.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected: 4-20  
RNG  
TIME CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to CUR  
TI except that current is active for 50 % to  
100 % and time is active for 0 % to 50 %.  
Relay controls cool, current controls heat.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected: 4-20  
RNG  
CURRENT OUTPUT RANGE allows the  
user to easily select 4-20 mA output or 0-20  
mA output operation without the need for  
recalibration of the instrument.  
4-20  
0-20  
0
1
CRANGE  
OUTRNG  
502  
CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE ALGORITHM  
— Used with Output Algorithm selections  
CURD, CURT, or TCUR.  
504  
52  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (SPLIT)—This  
setting should be used for Relay/Current and  
Current/Relay Duplex Outputs. It can also be  
used for Current Duplex when an Auxiliary  
Output board is present. This enables the  
normal control current output to provide heat  
control and the auxiliary current output to  
provide cool control. To enable this:  
50  
• AUX OUT in the Options Set Up group  
must be selected for Output.  
• The Auxiliary Current Output is scaled as  
desired for 0-50 % controller output.  
• Deadband for this configuration only  
applies to the Current Output. The  
Auxiliary Output must have the Deadband  
scaled in.  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
If a 2 % Deadband is desired, then enter 2.0  
for the Deadband selection in the Control  
Algorithm group. This will apply Deadband to  
the Current Output. In the Options group, set  
the Auxiliary Output LOW VAL selection to  
49.0 and the HIGH VAL selection to 0.0.  
CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (FULL)  
enables the Current Output to provide both  
heat and cool functions for control over 0-  
100 % of the controller output. The PID heat  
parameters apply when the output is greater  
than 50 % and the PID cool parameters  
apply when the output is less than 50 %. The  
second current output is not required for this  
type of duplex operation.  
100  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
RELAY CYCLE TIME INCREMENT  
selection is used only for Time Simplex and  
Duplex output configurations. This  
configuration sets the increment size of the  
relay cycle times in the Tuning and Tuning 2  
Set Up groups.  
RLY TYP  
ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAY—Cycle  
time in one-second increments.  
MECH  
0
1
SOLID STATE RELAY—Cycle time in 1/3  
second increments. This is useful for solid  
state relay applications that require shorter  
cycle times. DO NOT use this setting unless  
cycle times of less than 1 second are  
required.  
S S  
ATTENTION The Lockout selection must  
be set to NONE in order to view this  
selection.  
MOTOR TIME – Appears only when “TPSC”  
(Three Position Step Control) is selected as  
the Control Algorithm. This is the time it  
takes the motor to travel from 0 to 100 %  
(fully closed to fully open). This time can  
usually be found on the nameplate of the  
motor.  
5 to 1800 seconds  
MTR TI  
505  
54  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.9 Input 1 Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 1.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-9 INPUT 1 Group (Numeric Code 600) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
IN1TYP  
601  
INPUT 1 ACTUATION TYPE – This  
selection determines what actuation you are  
going to use for Input 1.  
B
1
B—B Thermocouple  
E H  
E L  
J H  
J M  
J L  
K H  
K M  
K L  
NNMH  
NNML  
NICH  
NICL  
R
S
T H  
T L  
W H  
W L  
100H  
100L  
200  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E H—E Thermocouple High  
E L—E Thermocouple Low  
J H—J Thermocouple High  
J M—J Thermocouple Med  
J L—J Thermocouple Low  
K H—K Thermocouple High  
K M—K Thermocouple Med  
K L—K Thermocouple Low  
NNMH—Ni-Ni-Moly Thermocouple High  
NNML—Ni-Ni-Moly Thermocouple Low  
NICH—Nicrosil-Nisil Thermocouple High  
NICL—Nicrosil-Nisil Thermocouple Low  
R—R Thermocouple  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
S—S Thermocouple  
T H—T Thermocouple High  
T L—T Thermocouple Low  
W H—W5W26 Thermocouple High  
W L—W5W26 Thermocouple Low  
100H—100 Ohm RTD High  
100L—100 Ohm RTD Low  
200—200 Ohm RTD  
500—500 Ohm RTD  
RADH—Radiamatic RH  
RADI—Radiamatic RI  
0-20—0 to 20 Milliamperes  
4-20—4 to 20 Milliamperes  
10m—0 to 10 Millivolts  
50m—0 to 50 Millivolts  
100m—0 to 100 Millivolts  
0-5—0 to 5 Volts  
1-5—1 to 5 Volts  
0-10—0 to 10 Volts  
TDIF—Thermocouple Differential  
PR—PR40-PR20 Thermocouple  
500  
RADH  
RADI  
0-20  
4-20  
10m  
50m  
100m  
0-5  
1-5  
0-10  
TDIF  
PR  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
XMITR1  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
602  
TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION—  
This selection lets you instruct the controller  
to characterize a linear input to represent a  
non-linear one. If characterization is  
performed by the transmitter itself, then  
select LIN (Linear).  
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
E H  
E L  
J H  
J M  
J L  
K H  
K M  
K L  
6
7
8
ATTENTION Prompt only appears when a  
linear actuation is selected at prompt IN1  
TYPE.  
NNMH  
NNML  
NICH  
NICL  
R
S
T H  
T L  
W H  
W L  
100H  
100L  
200  
9
FOR EXAMPLE:  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
If input 1 is a 4 to 20 mA signal, but the  
signal represents a type K H thermocouple,  
then configure K H and the controller will  
characterize the 4 to 20 mA signal so that it  
is treated as a type K thermocouple input  
(high range).  
Parameter definitions are the same as in IN1  
TYPE.  
500  
RADH  
RADI  
LIN  
SrT  
INPUT 1 HIGH RANGE VALUE in  
IN1 HI  
603  
−999 to 9999  
floating in  
engineering units  
engineering units is displayed for all inputs  
but can only be configured for linear or  
square root transmitter characterization.  
Scale the #1 input signal to the display value  
you want for 100 %.  
EXAMPLE:  
Process Variable = Flow  
Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Liters/Minute  
Actuation (Input 1) = 4 to 20 mA  
Characterization (XMITTER) = LINEAR  
Set IN1 HI display value to 250  
Set IN1 LO display value to 0  
Then 20 mA = 250 Liters/Minute  
and 4 mA = 0 Liters/Minute  
ATTENTION The control setpoint will be  
limited by the range of units selected here.  
56  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
INPUT 1 LOW RANGE VALUE in  
IN1 LO  
604  
−999 to 9999  
floating in  
engineering units  
engineering units is displayed for all inputs  
but can only be configured for linear or  
square root transmitter characterization.  
Scale the #1 input signal to the display value  
you want for 0 %. See example above.  
ATTENTION The control setpoint will be  
limited by the range of units selected here.  
RATIO ON INPUT 1—Select the Ratio value  
you want on Input 1.  
-20.0 to 20.0  
-999 to 9999  
RATIO1  
BIAS 1  
605  
606  
BIAS ON INPUT 1 — Bias is used to  
compensate the input for drift of an input  
value due to deterioration of a sensor, or  
some other cause. Select the bias value you  
want on Input 1.  
FILTER FOR INPUT 1—A software digital  
filter is provided for Input 1 to smooth the  
input signal. You can configure the first order  
lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds. If  
you do not want filtering, enter 0.  
0 to 120 seconds  
0 = No Filter  
FILTR1  
607  
608  
BURNOUT PROTECTION (SENSOR  
BREAK) provides most input types with  
upscale or downscale protection if the input  
fails.  
BRNOUT  
NO BURNOUT—Pre-configured Failsafe  
output (selected in the CONTROL Set up  
Group) applied if failed input is detected  
(does not apply for an input out of range).  
Diagnostic message IN1 FAIL is  
NONE  
0
1
intermittently flashed on the lower display.  
UPSCALE BURNOUT will force the Input 1  
signal to the full scale value when the sensor  
fails. Diagnostic message IN1 FAIL  
UP  
intermittently flashed on the lower display.  
The controller remains in Automatic control  
mode and adjusts the controller output signal  
in response to the full scale Input 1 signal  
developed by the Burnout circuitry.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will force the  
Input 1 signal to the lower range value when  
the sensor fails. Diagnostic message IN1  
FAIL intermittently flashed on the lower  
display.  
DOWN  
2
The controller remains in Automatic control  
mode and adjusts the controller output signal  
in response to the lower range Input 1 signal  
developed by the Burnout circuitry.  
This selection does not provide input failure  
detection and should only be used when a  
thermocouple input is connected to another  
instrument which supplies the Burnout  
current. (For this selection, no burnout signal  
is sent to the sensor.) when a thermocouple  
input is connected to another instrument  
which supplies the Burnout current. (For this  
selection, no burnout signal is sent to the  
sensor.)  
NOFS  
3
ATTENTION For Burnout to function  
properly on a 0-20 mA input type (or a 0-5V  
type that uses a dropping resistor), the  
dropping resistor must be remotely located  
(across the transmitter terminals).  
Otherwise, the input at the UDC terminals  
will always be 0 mA (i.e., within the normal  
operating range) when the 0-20 mA line is  
opened.  
EMISSIVITY is a correction factor applied to  
the Radiamatic input signal that is the ratio of  
the actual energy emitted from the target to  
the energy which would be emitted if the  
target were a perfect radiator.  
0.01 to 1.00  
EMISS  
609  
Available only for Radiamatic inputs.  
58  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.10 Input 2 Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 2.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-10 INPUT2 Group (Numeric Code 700) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
IN2TYP  
701  
INPUT 2 ACTUATION TYPE – This  
selection determines what actuation you are  
going to use for Input 2.  
DIS  
0-20  
4-20  
0-5  
1-5  
0-2  
0
DIS—Disable  
26  
27  
31  
32  
35  
0-20—0 to 20 mA (internal dropping resistor)  
4-20—4 to 20 mA (internal dropping resistor)  
0-5—0 to 5 Volts  
1-5—1 to 5 Volts  
0-2—0 to 2 Volts  
XMITR2  
702  
TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION—  
Same as Input 1 Transmitter  
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
E H  
E L  
J H  
J M  
J L  
K H  
K M  
K L  
NNMH  
NNML  
NIC H  
NIC L  
R
S
T H  
T L  
W H  
W L  
100H  
100L  
200  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
500  
RADH  
RADI  
LIN  
SrT  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
INPUT 2 HIGH RANGE VALUE in  
IN2 HI  
703  
−999 to 9999  
floating in  
engineering units  
engineering units is displayed for all inputs  
but can only be configured for linear or  
square root transmitter characterization.  
Scale the #2 input signal to the display value  
you want for 100 %.  
EXAMPLE:  
Process Variable = Flow  
Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Liters/Minute  
Actuation (Input 2) = 4 to 20 mA  
Characterization (XMITTER) = LINEAR  
Set IN1 HI display value to 250  
Set IN1 LO display value to 0  
Then 20 mA = 250 Liters/Minute  
and 4 mA = 0 Liters/Minute  
ATTENTION The control setpoint will be  
limited by the range of units selected here.  
INPUT 2 LOW RANGE VALUE in  
IN2 LO  
704  
−999 to 9999  
floating in  
engineering units  
engineering units is displayed for all inputs  
but can only be configured for linear or  
square root transmitter characterization.  
Scale the #2 input signal to the display value  
you want for 0 %. See example above.  
ATTENTION The control setpoint for Input  
2 will be limited by the range of units  
selected here.  
RATIO ON INPUT 2—Select the Ratio value  
you want on Input 2.  
-20.0 to 20.0  
-999 to 9999  
RATIO2  
BIAS 2  
705  
706  
BIAS ON INPUT 2 — Bias is used to  
compensate the input for drift of an input  
value due to deterioration of a sensor, or  
some other cause. Select the bias value you  
want on Input 2.  
FILTER FOR INPUT 2—A software digital  
filter is provided for Input 1 to smooth the  
input signal. You can configure the first order  
lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds. If  
you do not want filtering, enter 0.  
0 to 120 seconds  
0 = No Filter  
FILTR2  
707  
60  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.11 Control Set Up Group  
Introduction  
The functions listed in this group deal with how the controller will control the process  
including: Number of Tuning Parameter Sets, Setpoint Source, Tracking, Power-up  
Recall, Setpoint Limits, Output Direction and Limits, Deadband, and Hysteresis.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-11 Table 3-12 CONTRL Group (Numeric Code 800) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
PIDSET  
801  
NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER  
SETS—This selection lets you choose one  
or two sets of tuning constants (gain, rate,  
and reset). NOTE: The Tuning Group is  
automatically configured to have two PID  
sets when a Duplex Control Algorithm is  
configured.  
ONE  
0
1
ONE SET ONLY—Only one set of tuning  
parameters is available. Configure the values  
for:  
Gain (proportional band),  
Rate,  
Reset Time, and  
Cycle Time (if time proportional is used).  
2KBD  
TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE—  
Two sets of tuning parameters can be  
configured and can be selected at the  
operator interface or by using the Digital  
Inputs.  
Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see  
PID SET1 or PID SET2 then press  
or  
the values for:  
Gain, Rate, Reset, Cycle Time  
to switch between sets. Configure  
Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset #2, Cycle  
Time  
#2  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
2 PR  
2
TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC  
SWITCHOVER—When the process variable  
is GREATER than the value set at prompt  
SW VALUE (Switchover Value), the  
controller will use Gain, Rate, Reset, and  
Cycle Time. The active PID SET can be read  
in the lower display.  
When the process variable is LESS than the  
value set at prompt SW VALUE, the  
controller will use Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset  
#2, and Cycle #2 Time. The active PID SET  
can be read in the lower display.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected: SW  
VALUE  
2 SP  
3
TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC  
SWITCHOVER—When the setpoint is  
GREATER than the value set at prompt SW  
VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will  
use Gain, Rate, Reset, and Cycle.  
When the setpoint is LESS than the value  
set at prompt SW VALUE, the controller will  
use Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset #2, and Cycle  
#2.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected: SW  
VALUE  
Value in  
SW VAL  
802  
AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE—This  
is the value of Process Variable or Setpoint  
at which the controller will switch from  
Tuning Constant Set #2 to Set #1.  
engineering units  
within PV or SP  
range limits  
ATTENTION Only appears when PID  
SETS selection is configured for either 2  
PVSW or 2 SPSW.  
LSP’S  
803  
LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE—This  
selection determines what your local setpoint  
source will be.  
ONE  
0
LOCAL SETPOINT—The setpoint entered  
from the keyboard.  
62  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
TWO  
1
TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection  
lets you switch between two local setpoints  
using the SETPOINT SELECT key.  
RSPSRC  
804  
REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE— This  
selection lets you switch between the local  
and remote setpoints using the  
SETPOINT SELECT key.  
NONE—No remote setpoint.  
INPUT 2—Remote Setpoint is Input 2.  
NONE  
INP2  
0
1
SETPOINT TRACKING—The local setpoint  
can be configured to track either PV or RSP  
as listed below. Not configurable when Auto  
Bias is set.  
SP TRK  
805  
ATTENTION For selections other than  
NONE, LSP is stored in nonvolatile memory  
only when there is a mode change; i.e.,  
when switching from RSP to LSP or from  
Manual to Automatic. If power is lost, then  
the current LSP value is also lost.  
NO TRACKING—If local setpoint tracking is  
not configured, the LSP will not be altered  
when transfer from RSP to LSP is made.  
NONE  
0
PROCESS VARIABLE (PV)—Local setpoint  
tracks the PV when in manual.  
PROC  
RSP  
1
2
RSP—Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint  
when in automatic. When the controller  
transfers out of remote setpoint, the last  
value of the remote setpoint (RSP) is  
inserted into the local setpoint.  
POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE  
RECALL—This selection determines which  
mode and setpoint the controller will use  
when the controller restarts after a power  
loss.  
PWR UP  
806  
0
1
MANUAL, LSP—At power-up, the controller  
will use manual mode with the local setpoint  
displayed.  
MAN  
AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST LSP—At power-  
up, the controller will use automatic mode  
with the last local setpoint used before power  
down displayed.  
ALSP  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
2
AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST RSP—At  
power-up, the controller will use automatic  
mode with the last remote setpoint used  
before power down displayed.  
ARSP  
3
4
LAST MODE/LAST SETPOINT used before  
power down.  
AMSP  
AMLS  
LAST MODE/LAST LOCAL SETPOINT on  
power down.  
THREE POSITION CONTROL STEP  
PWROUT  
807  
OUTPUT START-UP MODE—This selection  
determines what position the motor will be in  
when powered up or in the failsafe position.  
LAST OUTPUT—At power-up in automatic  
mode, the motor position will be the last one  
prior to power down. When the unit goes into  
FAILSAFE, it will stay in automatic mode;  
motor will not be driven to the configured  
failsafe position.  
LAST  
FSAF  
0
1
FAILSAFE OUTPUT—At power-up in  
manual mode, the motor will be driven to  
either the 0 % or 100 % output position,  
whichever is selected at prompt FAILSAFE.  
For Burnout/None, when the unit goes into  
FAILSAFE, it will go to manual mode; motor  
will be driven to the configured failsafe  
position.  
SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT—This selection  
prevents the local and remote setpoints from  
going above the value selected here. The  
setting must be equal or less than the upper  
range of the PV.  
0 to 100 % of the  
PV range  
SP Hi  
808  
809  
810  
SET POINT LOW LIMIT—This selection  
prevents the local and remote setpoints from  
going below the value selected here. The  
setting must be equal or greater than the  
lower range of the PV.  
0 to 100 % of the  
PV range  
SP Lo  
ACTION  
CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—Select  
direct or reverse output action.  
DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The  
controller’s output increases as the process  
variable increases.  
DIR  
0
1
REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The  
controller’s output decreases as the process  
variable increases.  
REV  
64  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the highest  
value of output beyond which you do not  
want the controller automatic output to  
exceed.  
OUT Hi  
811  
0 % to 100 %  
–5 % to 105 %  
For relay output types.  
For current output types.  
LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the lowest  
value of output below which you do not want  
the controller automatic output to exceed.  
OUT Lo  
D BAND  
812  
813  
0 % to 100 %  
–5 % to 105 %  
For relay output types.  
For current output types.  
DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between  
the operating ranges of output 1 and output 2  
in which neither output operates (positive  
value) or both outputs operate (negative  
value).  
Time Duplex  
On-Off Duplex  
Three Position Step  
–5.0 to 25.0 %  
0.0 to 25.0 %  
0.5 to 5.0 %  
0.0 to 100.0 % of  
PV  
HYST  
814  
HYSTERESIS (OUTPUT RELAY) is an  
adjustable overlap of the ON/OFF states of  
each control output. This is the difference  
between the value of the process variable at  
which the control outputs energize and the  
value at which they de-energize.  
ATTENTION Only applicable for ON/OFF  
control.  
0 to 100 %  
FAILSF  
815  
FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE—The value  
used here will also be the output level when  
you have Communications SHED set to  
failsafe or when NO BURNOUT is configured  
and Input 1 fails.  
ATTENTION Applies for all output types  
except Three Position Step Control.  
FAILSF  
816  
THREE POSITION STEP FAILSAFE  
OUTPUT  
0 PCT—Motor goes to closed position.  
100 PCT—Motor goes to open position.  
0
100  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
FSMODE  
817  
FAILSAFE MODE  
0
1
NON LATCHING—Controller stays in last  
mode that was being used (automatic or  
manual); output goes to failsafe value.  
(NOTE 1, NOTE 2)  
No L  
LATCHING—Controller goes to manual  
mode; output goes to failsafe value. (NOTE  
2)  
LACH  
PBorGN  
818  
PROPORTIONAL BAND UNITS—Select  
one of the following for the Proportional (P)  
term of the PID algorithm:  
GAIN  
PB  
0
1
GAIN selects the unitless term of gain for the  
P term of the PID algorithm.  
Where: GAIN = 100 % FS  
PB%  
PROPORTIONAL BAND selects units of  
percent proportional band for the P term of  
the PID algorithm.  
Where: PB % = 100 % FS  
GAIN  
MINRPM  
819  
RESET UNITS—Selects units of minutes per  
repeat or repeats per minute for the I term of  
the PID algorithm.  
20 Repeats per Minute = 0.05 Minutes per  
Repeat.  
MIN  
0
1
MINUTES PER REPEAT—The time  
between each repeat of the proportional  
action by reset.  
RPM  
REPEATS PER MINUTE—The number of  
times per minute that the proportional action  
is repeated by reset.  
NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.  
NOTE 2: If controller is in Manual upon failure, output will maintain its value at time of failure.  
NOTE 3: These selections appear when the Control Algorithm is selected for 3PSTEP.  
NOTE 4: The local setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For  
example, if SP = 1500 and the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200, the new local setpoint will be 1200.  
NOTE 5: Reset limits and Dropoff are not displayed when Three Position Step Control is configured.  
66  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.12 Options Group  
Introduction  
The Options group lets you configure the remote mode switch (Digital Inputs) to a  
specific contact closure response, or configure the Auxiliary Output to be a specific  
selection with desired scaling.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-13 OPTION Group (Numeric Code 900) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION  
AUXOUT  
901  
This selection provides an mA output  
representing one of several control  
parameters. The display for auxiliary output  
viewing will be in engineering units for all but  
output. Output will be displayed in percent.  
ATTENTION Other prompts affected by  
these selections: 4mA VAL and 20mA VAL.  
ATTENTION Output cannot be configured  
when Three Position Step Control is used.  
DIS  
IN1  
NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT  
0
1
INPUT 1—This represents the configured  
range of input 1.  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
Type J Thermocouple (0 °F to 1600 °F)  
0 °F display = 0 % output  
1600 °F display = 100 % output  
IN2  
INPUT 2 represents the value of the  
configured range of input 2.  
2
3
PROC  
PROCESS VARIABLE—Represents the  
value of the Process Variable. PV = Input  
XxRatioX + BiasX  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DEV  
4
DEVIATION (PROCESS VARIABLE  
MINUS SETPOINT)—Represents –100 %  
to +100 % of the selected PV span in  
engineering units.  
Zero deviation will produce a center scale  
(12 mA or 50 %) output. A negative deviation  
equal in magnitude to the Auxiliary Output  
High Scaling Factor will produce a low end  
output (4 mA or 0 %) output. A positive  
deviation equal in magnitude to the Auxiliary  
Output Low Scaling Factor will produce a  
high end output (20 mA or 100 %).  
FOR EXAMPLE:  
Input 1 = Type T High Thermocouple  
PV range = –300 °F to +700 °F  
PV span = 1000 °F  
Deviation Range = –1000 °F to +1000 °F  
Auxiliary Output Low Scale Value = 0.0  
Auxiliary Output High Scale Value = 1000  
If PV = 500 °F and SP = 650 °F  
then Deviation Display = –150 °F, which  
is  
–7.5% of the Deviation Range, so  
Auxiliary Output = 50% – 7.5% = 42.5%  
OUT  
5
OUTPUT—Represents the displayed  
controller output in percent (%). Cannot be  
used with  
Three Position Step Control.  
SP  
6
7
8
SETPOINT—Represents the value of the  
setpoint currently in use and is shown in the  
same units as those used by the PV.  
LSP 1  
LSP 2  
LOCAL SETPOINT ONE—Auxiliary output  
represents Local Setpoint 1 regardless of  
active setpoint.  
LOCAL SETPOINT TWO—Auxiliary output  
represents Local Setpoint 2 regardless of  
active setpoint.  
Value in  
Engineering Units  
0PCT  
902  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING  
FACTOR— This is a value in engineering  
units used to represent all AUX OUT  
parameters except Output.  
For Output, this is a value in percent and can  
be any value between –5 % and +105 %.  
However, keep in mind that relay output  
types can only be scaled 0 % to 100 %.  
68  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
Value in  
Engineering Units  
100 PCT  
903  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING  
FACTOR— This is a value in engineering  
units used to represent all AUX OUT  
parameters except Output.  
For Output, this is a value in percent and can  
be any value between –5 % and +105 %.  
However, keep in mind that relay output  
types can only be scaled 0 % to 100 %.  
4-20  
0-20  
0
1
CRANGE  
904  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT RANGE allows the  
user to easily select 4-20mA output or 0-  
20mA output operation without the need for  
recalibration of the instrument.  
ATTENTION Changing the Auxiliary  
Output Range will result in the loss of Field  
Calibration values and will restore Factory  
Calibration values.  
905  
DIGIN1  
DIGITAL INPUT 1 SELECTIONS—All  
selections are available for Input 1. The  
controller returns to its original state when  
contact opens, except when overruled by the  
keyboard.  
NONE  
MAN  
NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTIONS  
0
1
TO MANUAL—Contact closure puts the  
affected loop into manual mode. Contact  
open returns controller to former mode.  
LSP  
TO LOCAL SETPOINT—When a remote  
setpoint is configured, contact closure puts  
the controller into local setpoint 1. When  
contact opens, the controller returns to  
former operation—local or remote setpoint—  
unless SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed  
while digital input is active. If this happens,  
the controller will stay in the local setpoint  
mode when contact opens.  
2
SP2  
DIR  
TO LOCAL SETPOINT TWO—Contact  
closure puts the controller into local setpoint  
2.  
3
4
TO DIRECT ACTION—Contact closure  
selects direct controller action.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
HOLD  
Numeric  
Code  
TO HOLD—Contact closure suspends  
Setpoint Program or Setpoint Ramp. When  
contact reopens, the controller starts from  
the Hold point of the Ramp/Program unless  
the Ramp/Program was not previously  
started via the RUN/HOLD key.  
5
This selection applies to either loop.  
PID2  
RUN  
TO PID2—Contact closure selects PID Set  
2.  
6
7
RUN—Contact closure starts a stopped SP  
Ramp or Program. Upper left character  
blinks “R”. Reopening the contact puts  
controller in HOLD mode.  
This selection applies to either loop.  
Begn  
EXTERNAL SP PROGRAM RESET—  
Contact closure resets SP Program back to  
the beginning of the first segment in the  
program and places the program in the  
HOLD mode. Program cycle number is not  
affected. Reopening switch has no effect.  
8
This selection applies to either loop.  
ATTENTION Once the last segment of the  
setpoint program has timed out, the  
controller enters the mode of action specified  
in the configuration data and the program  
cannot be reset to the beginning of the first  
segment by digital input closure.  
NO I  
INHIBIT INTEGRAL (RESET)—Contact  
closure disables PID Integral (Reset) action.  
9
MNFS  
MANUAL FAILSAFE OUTPUT—Controller  
goes to Manual mode, output goes to the  
Failsafe value.  
10  
ATTENTION This will cause a bump in the  
output when switching from Automatic to  
Manual. The switch back from Manual to  
Automatic is bumpless. When the switch is  
closed, the output can be adjusted from the  
keyboard.  
LOCK  
KEYBOARD LOCKOUT—Contact closure  
disables all keys. Lower display shows  
LOCKED if a key is pressed.  
11  
70  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
TIMR  
TIMER—Contact closure starts timer, if  
enabled. Reopening the switch has no  
effect.  
12  
TUNE  
INITIATE LIMIT CYCLE TUNING—Contact  
closure starts the slow tuning process. The  
lower display shows DoSLOW. Opening the  
contact has no effect.  
13  
INIT  
SETPOINT INITIALIZATION—Contact  
closure forces the setpoint to the current PV  
value. Opening the contact has no effect.  
14  
RSP  
TO REMOTE SETPOINT—Contact closure  
selects the Remote setpoint.  
15  
16  
MNLT  
MANUAL LATCHING—Contact closure  
transition forces the loop to Manual mode.  
Opening the switch has no effect. If the M-A  
RESET key is pressed while the switch is  
closed, the loop will return to Automatic  
mode.  
TRAK  
OUTPUT TRACKS INPUT 2—Contact  
closure allows Output to track Input 2. While  
the switch is open, the output is in  
17  
accordance with its pre-defined functionality.  
When the switch is closed, the output value  
(in percent) will track the Input 2 percent of  
range value. When the switch is reopened,  
the output will start at this last output value  
and normal PID action will then take over  
control. The transfer is bumpless.  
STRT  
PV HOTSTART—Contact closure starts the  
SP Ramp or SP Program at the original  
selected starting Setpoint Value that existed  
at the time that the SP Ramp or Program  
was first started. Opening contact has no  
effect. This configuration must be selected  
prior to the first time the SP Ramp or  
18  
Program is placed in the RUN mode, as  
otherwise the unit will not be able to capture  
the initial Setpoint value. This selection  
allows the unit to retain the initial Setpoint  
value even if power to the unit is lost.  
When the STATE selection in the SP Ramp  
or Program Set Up group is set to HOLD and  
the digital input contact is left closed, then  
when the end of the program or ramp is  
reached, the program or ramp will  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
automatically restart at the initial Setpoint  
value.  
If power to the unit is lost while while a SP  
Ramp or Program was running, then if the  
contact is closed at power up, the unit will  
automatically restart the SP Ramp or  
Program at the captured Setpoint value.  
DI1COM  
906  
DIGITAL INPUT 1 COMBINATION  
SELECTIONS —This selection allows the  
specified function to occur in addition to the  
one chosen for DIG IN 1.  
DIS  
DISABLE—Disables combination function.  
0
1
+PD2  
PLUS PID2—Contact closure selects PID  
Set 2.  
+DIR  
+SP2  
+SP1  
PLUS DIRECT ACTION—Contact closure  
selects direct controller action.  
2
3
PLUS SETPOINT 2—Contact closure puts  
the controller into setpoint 2.  
PLUS SETPOINT 1—Contact closure puts  
the controller into setpoint 1.  
4
5
+RUN  
PLUS RUN SETPOINT  
PROGRAM/RAMP—Contact closure starts  
SP Program/Ramp if enabled.  
DIGIN2  
907  
908  
Same selections as  
for Digital Input 1  
DIGITAL INPUT 2 SELECTIONS  
DI2COM  
Same selections as  
Digital Input 1  
DIGITAL INPUT 2 COMBINATIONS  
Combinations  
72  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.13 Communications Group  
Introduction  
The Communications group lets you configure the controller to be connected to a host  
computer via Modbus® or Ethernet TCP/IP protocol. Two parameters in this Group,  
Communications Station Address and TX Delay, are also used for IR communications.  
No other parameters affect IR communications.  
Introduction  
A controller with a communications option looks for messages from the host computer. If  
these messages are not received within the configured shed time, the controller will  
SHED from the communications link and return to stand-alone operation. You can also  
set the SHED output mode and setpoint recall, and communication units.  
Up to 99 addresses can be configured over this link. The number of units that can be  
configured depends on the link length, with 31 being the maximum for short link lengths  
and 15 drops being the maximum at the maximum link length.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-14 Communications Group (Numeric Code 1000) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of  
Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
1 to 99  
Numeric  
Code  
ComADR  
1001  
COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS—This  
is a number that is assigned to a controller that is  
to be used with the communications option. This  
number will be its address. This parameter is also  
used for the IR communications link.  
COMSTA  
1002  
COMMUNICATIONS SELECTION  
DIS  
MODB  
ETHR  
0
1
2
DISABLE—Disables the communications option  
MODBUS—Enable Modbus RTU communications  
ETHERNET—Enable Ethernet Communications  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
IRENAB  
BAUD  
1003  
1004  
INFRARED COMMUNICATIONS – Enables/  
Disables the IR Port.  
BAUD RATE is the transmission speed in bits per  
second. This value is used for both RS-485 and IR  
Communications, but for IR Communications,  
values below 19200 baud are interpreted as being  
19200 baud.  
4800  
9600  
19200  
38400  
0
1
2
3
4800 BAUD  
9600 BAUD  
19200 BAUD  
38400 BAUD  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of  
Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
TX_DLY  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
1 to 500  
milliseconds  
1005  
TX DELAY—Configurable response-delay timer  
allows you to force the UDC to delay its response  
for a time period of from 1 to 500 milliseconds  
compatible with the host system  
hardware/software. This parameter is also used for  
the IR communications link.  
WS_FLT  
1006  
Defines word/byte order of floating point data for  
communications. Byte values:  
0
1
2
3
seeeeeee emmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm  
Where:  
s = sign, e = exponent, m = mantissa bit  
FP B  
FPBB  
FP L  
0
1
2
3
0
1
3
2
1
0
2
3
2
3
1
0
3
2
0
1
FPLB  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
SDENAB  
SHDTIM  
1007  
1008  
SHED ENABLE—Disables/enables shed  
functionaliy.  
0 to 255  
Sample  
Periods  
SHED TIME—The number that represents how  
many sample periods there will be before the  
controller sheds from communications. Each  
period equals 1/3 seconds; 0 equals No shed.  
Note: If ComSTA is set to MODBUS and if  
SHEDENAB is set to DISABL, Shed Time will not  
be configurable.  
SDMODE  
1009  
SHED CONTROLLER MODE AND OUTPUT  
LEVEL—Determines the mode of local control you  
want when the controller is shed from the  
communications link.  
LAST  
0
LAST—SAME MODE AND OUTPUT—The  
controller will return to the same mode (manual or  
automatic) at the same output level that it had  
before shed.  
MAN  
1
2
TO MAN—MANUAL MODE, SAME OUTPUT—  
The controller will return to manual mode at the  
same output level that it had before shed.  
FSAFE  
FSAFE—MANUAL MODE, FAILSAFE OUTPUT—  
The controller will return to manual mode at the  
output value selected at Control prompt FAILSAFE.  
74  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of  
Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
AUTO  
Numeric  
Code  
3
TO AUTO—AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST SP—The  
controller will return to the automatic mode and the  
last setpoint used before shed.  
SHD_SP  
1010  
SHED SETPOINT RECALL  
Note: If SHEDENAB=DISABLE, this prompt will not  
be configurable.  
LSP  
CSP  
0
1
TO LSP—Controller will use last local or remote  
setpoint used.  
TO CSP—When in “slave” mode, the controller will  
store the last host computer setpoint and use it at  
the Local setpoint. When in “monitor” mode, the  
controller will shed to the last UDC Local or  
Remote setpoint used, and the LSP is unchanged.  
PCT  
EGR  
0
1
UNITS  
1011  
1012  
1013  
1014  
PERCENT  
ENGINEERING UNITS  
-20.0 to 20.0  
CSRATIO  
CSP_BI  
LOOPBK  
COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO—Computer  
setpoint ratio.  
-999 to 9999  
COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO—Computer  
setpoint ratio in Engineering Units.  
DIS  
ENAB  
0
1
LOCAL LOOPBACK tests the communications  
hardware.  
DISABLE—Disables the Loopback test.  
ENABLE—Allows loopback test. The UDC goes  
into Loopback mode in which it sends and receives  
its own message. The UDC displays PASS or FAIL  
status in the upper display and LOOPBACK in the  
lower display while the test is running. The UDC  
will go into manual mode when LOOPBACK is  
enabled with the output at the Failsafe value. The  
test will run until the operator disables it here, or  
until power is turned off and on.  
ATTENTION The instrument does not have to be  
connected to the external communications link in  
order to perform this test. If it is connected, only  
one instrument should run the loopback test at a  
time. The host computer should not be transmitting  
on the link while the loopback test is active.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.14 Alarms Set Up Group  
Introduction  
An alarm is an indication that an event that you have configured (for example—Process  
Variable) has exceeded one or more alarm limits. There are two alarms available. Each  
alarm has two setpoints. You can configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on  
various controller parameters.  
There are two alarm output selections, High and Low. You can configure each setpoint to  
alarm either High or Low. These are called single alarms.  
You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both  
high and low. A single adjustable Hysteresis of 0 % to 100 % is configurable for the  
alarm setpoint.  
See Table 2-3 in the Installation section for Alarm relay contact information.  
The prompts for the Alarm Outputs appear whether or not the alarm relays are physically  
present. This allows the Alarm status to be shown on the display and/or sent via  
communications to a host computer.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-15 ALARMS Group (Numeric Code 1100) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
A1S1TY  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
1101  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what  
you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent.  
It can represent the Process Variable,  
Deviation, Input 1, Input 2, Output, and if you  
have a model with communications, you can  
configure the controller to alarm on SHED. If  
you have setpoint programming, you can  
alarm when a segment goes ON or OFF.  
NO ALARM  
INPUT 1  
INPUT 2  
NONE  
IN 1  
IN 2  
0
1
2
PROCESS VARIABLE  
DEVIATION  
OUTPUT (NOTE 1)  
SHED FROM COMMUNICATIONS  
EVENT ON (SP PROGRAMMING)  
EVENT OFF (SP PROGRAMMING)  
ALARM ON MANUAL MODE (NOTE 2)  
REMOTE SETPOINT  
PROC  
DE  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
OUT  
SHED  
E-ON  
E-OF  
MAN  
RSP  
FSAF  
PrRT  
DI 1  
FAILSAFE  
PV RATE OF CHANGE  
DIGITAL INPUT 1 ACTUATED (NOTE 7)  
DIGITAL INPUT 2 ACTUATED (NOTE 7)  
LOOP BREAK (NOTE 4)  
DI 2  
BRAK  
76  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DE 2  
TC W  
TC F  
16  
17  
18  
DEVIATION FROM LSP 2 (NOTE 3)  
THERMOCOUPLE WARNING (NOTE 5)  
THERMOCOUPLE FAILING (NOTE 6)  
ATTENTION  
NOTE 1. When the controller is configured  
for Three Position Step Control, alarms set  
for Output will not function.  
NOTE 2. Alarm 1 is not available if the Timer  
is enabled because Alarm 1 is dedicated to  
Timer output.  
NOTE 3. This Deviation Alarm is based upon  
deviation from the 2nd Local Setpoint or  
Remote SP regardless of whichever SP is  
active.  
NOTE 4. Loop Break monitors the control  
loop to determine if it is working. When  
enabled, the control output is checked  
against the minimum and maximum output  
limit settings. When the output reaches one  
of these limits, a timer begins. If the timer  
expires and the output has not caused the  
PV to move by a pre-determined amount,  
then the alarm activates, thus signalling that  
the loop is broken. The loop break timer  
value must be configured by the operator as  
the AxSx VAL entry. This value is in  
seconds with a range of 0 to 3600 seconds.  
A setting of 0 is equivalent to an  
instantaneous loop break when the output  
reaches one of its limit values.  
The amount of PV Movement required is  
determined by the “UNITS” setting in the  
Display Setup Group. For the Degrees F  
configuration, the PV must move by 3° in the  
desired direction in the time allowed. For the  
Degrees C configuration, the PV must move  
by 2° in the desired direction in the time  
allowed. For the “NONE” selection, the PV  
must move 1% of the PV range in the time  
allowed.  
Loop Break alarms do not have a  
HIGH/LOW State configuration, they are  
always assumed to be a HIGH state alarm.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
NOTE 5. Thermocouple Warning means  
that the instrument has detected that the  
Thermocouple Input is starting to fail. Not  
valid for other input types.  
NOTE 6. Thermocouple Failing means that  
the instrument has detected that the  
Thermocouple Input is in imminent danger of  
failing. Not valid for other input types.  
NOTE 7. For the Digital Input selections, DI  
1 can be either enabled or disabled in the  
Options Group (See Section 3.12), but DI 2  
must be enabled in the Options Group for the  
alarm to function properly.  
Value in  
engineering units  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the  
value at which you want the alarm type  
chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to actuate. The  
value depends on what the setpoint has  
been configured to represent. No setpoint is  
required for alarms configured for  
A1S1VA  
1102  
Communications SHED. For SP  
Programming the value is the segment  
number for which the event applies.  
This prompt does not appear for “Alarm on  
Manual” type alarm. For example:  
A1S1TYPE = MANUAL.  
A1S1HL  
1103  
If Setpoint Programming is disabled or if  
the Alarm Type is not configured for  
Event On/Off:  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select  
whether you want the alarm type chosen in  
prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm High or Low.  
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH ALARM  
LOW ALARM  
0
1
78  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
A1S1EV  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
1103  
If Setpoint Programming is enabled and if  
the Alarm Type is configured for Event  
On/Off:  
ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 1—Select  
whether you want the alarm type chosen in  
prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm the beginning or  
end of a segment in setpoint Ramp/Soak  
programming.  
BEGIN  
END  
0
1
BEGINNING OF SEGMENT  
END OF SEGMENT  
ATTENTION Alarms configured for events  
will not operate on Setpoint Program  
segments of zero length.  
A1S2TY  
A1S2VA  
1104  
1105  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what  
you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent.  
The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.  
Value in  
engineering units  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the  
value at which you want the alarm type  
chosen in prompt A1S2TYPE to actuate.  
The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.  
ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Same as  
A1S1HL.  
HIGH  
LOW  
0
1
A1S2HL  
A1S2EV  
A2S1TY  
1106  
1106  
1107  
ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 2—Same as  
A1S1EV.  
BEGIN  
END  
0
1
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what  
you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 2 to represent.  
The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.  
ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay  
Duplex unless using Dual Relay PWA.  
Value in  
engineering units  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the  
value at which you want the alarm type  
chosen in prompt A2S1TYPE to actuate.  
A2S1VA  
1108  
The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
A2S1HL  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Same as  
A1S1HL.  
HIGH  
LOW  
0
1
1109  
ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 1—Same as  
A1S1EV.  
BEGIN  
END  
0
1
A2S1EV  
A2S2TY  
1109  
1110  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what  
you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 2 to represent.  
The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.  
ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay  
Duplex unless using Dual Relay PWA.  
Value in  
engineering units  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the  
value at which you want the alarm type  
chosen in prompt A2S2TYPE to actuate.  
A2S2VA  
1111  
The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.  
ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Same as  
A1S1HL.  
HIGH  
LOW  
0
1
A2S1HL  
A2S1EV  
ALHYST  
1112  
1112  
1113  
ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 2—Same as  
A1S1EV.  
BEGIN  
END  
0
1
0.0 to 100.0 % of  
span or full output  
as appropriate  
ALARM HYSTERESIS—A single adjustable  
hysteresis is provided on alarms such that  
when the alarm is OFF it activates at exactly  
the alarm setpoint; when the alarm is ON, it  
will not deactivate until the variable is 0.0 %  
to 100 % away from the alarm setpoint.  
Configure the hysteresis of the alarms based  
on INPUT signals as a % of input range  
span.  
Configure the hysteresis of the alarm based  
on OUTPUT signals as a % of the full scale  
output range.  
80  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
ALARM1  
1114  
LATCHING ALARM OUTPUT 1—Alarm  
output 1 can be configured to be Latching or  
Non-latching.  
NO LAT  
LATCH  
0
1
NO LAT—Non-latching  
LATCH—Latching  
ATTENTION When configured for latching,  
the alarm will stay active after the alarm  
condition ends until the RUN/HOLD key is  
pressed.  
BLOCK  
1115  
ALARM BLOCKING—Prevents nuisance  
alarms when the controller is first powered  
up. The alarm is suppressed until the  
parameter gets to the non-alarm limit or  
band. Alarm blocking affects both alarm  
setpoints.  
DIS  
AL1  
AL 2  
AL12  
DISABLE—Disables blocking  
AL1—Blocks alarm 1 only  
AL2—Blocks alarm 2 only  
AL12—Blocks both alarms  
0
1
2
3
ATTENTION When enabled on power up  
or initial enabling via configuration, the alarm  
will not activate unless the parameter being  
monitored has not been in an alarm condition  
for a minimum of one control cycle (167 ms).  
DIAGAL  
1116  
DIAGNOSTIC—Monitors the Current Output  
and/or Auxiliary Output for an open circuit  
condition. If either of these two outputs falls  
below about 3.5 mA, then an Alarm is  
activated. This configuration is in addition to  
whatever was selected for AxSxTYPE.  
DIS  
AL1  
AL 2  
DISWRN  
DISABLE—Disables Diagnostic Alarm  
ALARM 1—Alarm 1 is diagnostic alarm  
ALARM 2—Alarm 2 is diagnostic alarm  
DISABLE WARNING—Disables Output Fail  
message on lower display  
0
1
2
3
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.15 Display Set Up Group  
Introduction  
This group includes selections for Decimal place, Units of temperature, Language and  
Power frequency.  
Function Prompts  
Table 3-16 DISPLY Group (Numeric Code 1200) Function Prompts  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
DECIMAL POINT LOCATION—This  
selection determines where the decimal point  
appears in the display.  
NONE  
ONE  
TWO  
DECMAL  
1201  
NONE—No Decimal Place—fixed, no auto-  
ranging 8888  
ONE—1 decimal place 888.8  
TWO—2 decimal places 88.88  
ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur for  
selections of one or two decimal places. For  
example, should the instrument be  
configured for two decimal places and the  
PV exceeds 99.99, then the display will  
change to a single decimal place so that  
values of 100.0 and above can be shown.  
TEMPERATURE UNITS—This selection will  
affect the indication and operation.  
UNITS  
1202  
DEG F—Degrees Fahrenheit – Degrees F  
Annunciator lighted  
F
0
1
2
DEG C—Degrees Centigrade – Degrees C  
Annunciator lighted  
C
NONE—No temperature annunciators  
lighted. Upper and Lower Displays will show  
temperature in Degrees Fahrenheit when  
inputs are configured for Thermocouple or  
RTD types.  
NONE  
82  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Function Prompt  
Lower Display  
Selection or Range of Setting  
Parameter  
Definition  
Upper Display  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
English  
Numeric  
Code  
POWER LINE FREQUENCY—Select  
whether your controller is operating at 50 or  
60 Hertz.  
FREQ  
1203  
60  
50  
0
1
ATTENTION For controllers powered by  
+24 Vdc, this configuration should be set to  
the AC line frequency used to produce the  
+24 Vdc supply.  
Incorrect setting of this parameter may cause  
normal mode noise problems in the input  
readings.  
DEFAULT DISPLAY—For single display  
units, only. This setting selects the default  
parameter shown on the upper display.  
Pressing the LOWER DISPLAY key will  
cycle through all applicable values. One  
minute after the last press of the display key,  
the display will revert to the display  
configured here.  
DISPLY  
1205  
SETPOINT—Active Setpoint  
PV-YES—Process Variable with lower  
display prompt.  
SP  
PRY  
0
1
PV-NO—Process Variable with no lower  
display prompt.  
PRN  
2
LOWER DISPLY—For dual display units,  
only. Select whether the unit uses single or  
dual display.  
LWRDSP  
LNGUAG  
1204  
1206  
ENAB  
DIS  
0
1
ENAB—Enable Dual Display  
DIS—Disable Dual Display (Single Display  
Only)  
LANGUAGE—This selection designates the  
prompt language.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
ENGL  
FREN  
GERM  
SPAN  
ITAL  
ENGLISH  
FRENCH  
GERMAN  
SPANISH  
ITALIAN  
NUMB  
NUMERIC  
THERMOCOUPLE DIAGNOSTICS—Enable  
or disable Thermocouple diagnostic  
messages.  
TCDIAG  
1207  
ENAB—Enable Diagnostic Messages  
DIS—Disable Diagnostic Messages  
ENAB  
DIS  
0
1
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.16 P.I.E. Tool Ethernet and Email Configuration Screens  
Introduction  
These screens only appear in instruments that have Ethernet Communications. Ethernet  
and Email parameters can only be configured via the Process Instrument Explorer (P.I.E.  
Tool®). The figures in this section show screen-shots of the Configuration Screens from  
the PC version of the P.I.E. Tool®. Pocket PC Configuration Screens are generally  
similar in format but smaller.  
Ethernet Configuration Screen  
This controller is shipped from the factory with the IP Address set to 10.0.0.2, the Subnet  
Mask set to 255.255.255.0 and the Default Gateway set to 0.0.0.0. Consult your  
Information Technologies (IT) representative as to how these should be configured for  
your installation. The MAC address is printed on the product label located on the  
instrument’s case.  
These settings can be changed via the Ethernet Configuration Screen as shown in Figure  
3-1.  
See Section 4.23 – Configuring your Ethernet Connection for more information.  
Figure 3-1 Ethernet Configuration Screen  
84  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
WARNING  
After you change the IP Address, you will no longer be able to communicate with the instrument  
via Ethernet until you change the P.I.E. Tool’s IP Address setting in the PC COMM SETUP  
section to match the setting that is now in your controller. See Section 4.23 – Configuring your  
Ethernet Connection for more information.  
Email Configuration Screen  
This controller may be configured to support sending an Email when an alarm occurs.  
Emails are sent only when the selected alarm transitions from the OFF to the ON state.  
Figure 3-2 Email Configuration Screen  
This controller cannot receive Emails, so it is suggested that you configure the From  
Email: window with a non-Email style address that will make it easy for you to  
determine which controller sent the Email. For Email technical reasons, the entry in the  
From Email: window cannot have spaces. See Figure 3-2.  
If you do not know your SMTP IP Address for outgoing Email, then contact your  
Information Technologies (IT) representative. If your PC is on the same LAN that will be  
used by the controller and which also connects to the Email server, then the SMTP IP  
Address may generally be found by opening a DOS shell and typing:  
ping smtp.[your domain name and extension], i.e., ping smtp.your_isp.com  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
The content of the Emails sent by this controller contains the Alarm that triggered the  
Email, its settings and the current value (if applicable) of the monitored variable. For  
example, the content of an Email triggered by Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 that is configured to  
monitor Input 1 would look something like this:  
Name: Alarm 1 SP1, Type: INPUT1, Event: HIGH/END, Value = 500.00,  
Actual = 712.69  
The content of an Email triggered by Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 that is configured to monitor  
Digital Input 1 would look something like this:  
Name: Alarm 2 SP1, Type: DIG IN1, Event: HIGH/END, Value = 0.00,  
Actual = 0.00  
ATTENTION  
Email will always be time-stamped with the date that the Ethernet Software in the instrument  
was last modified.  
If the SMTP address on your network is changed, such as can happen when a server is  
replaced, then you must reconfigure the Email SMTP IP address in this instrument to match the  
new IP address.  
86  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration  
3.17 Configuration Record Sheet  
Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have a record of  
how your controller was configured.  
Group  
Prompt  
Value or Factory  
Function Prompt Selection Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or Factory  
Selection Setting  
PB or GAIN  
RATE T  
I MIN or I RPM  
MANRST  
PB2 or GAIN 2  
RATE2T  
I2 MIN or I2 RPM  
CYCT1 or CT1  
X3  
CYC2T2 or CT2  
X3  
SECUR  
LOCK  
AUTOMA  
A TUNE  
RN HLD  
_______ 1.0  
_______ 0.00  
_______ 1.0  
_______ 1.0  
_______ 0.0  
_______ 0.00  
_______ 1.0  
_______ 20  
_______ 20  
_______ 20  
_______ 20  
TUNING  
CTRALG  
TIMER  
PERIOD  
START  
L DISP  
_______ PIDA  
_______ DIS  
_______ 0:01  
_______ KEY  
_______ TREM  
_______ KEY  
_______ MIN  
ALGOR  
RESET  
INCRMT  
OUTALG  
OUTALG  
CRANGE  
RLY TY  
MTR TI  
_______ NOTE 1  
_______ 4-20  
_______ MECH  
_______  
0
_______  
5
_______ NONE  
_______ ENAB  
_______ ENAB  
_______ ENAB  
_______ ENAB  
SP SEL  
SPRAMP  
TI MIN  
FINLSP  
SPRATE  
EUHRUP  
EUHRDN  
SPPROG  
_______ DIS  
IN1TYP  
XMITR1  
IN1 HI  
IN1 LO  
RATIO1  
BIAS 1  
FILTR1  
BRNOUT  
EMIS  
_______ K H  
_______ LIN  
_______ 2400  
SPRAMP  
INPUT1  
_______  
3
_______ 1000  
_______ DIS  
_______  
0
_______  
_______  
0
0
_______ 1.00  
_______ 0.0  
_______ DIS  
_______  
1
_______ UP  
_______ 1.0  
FUZZY  
TUNE  
DUPLEX  
AT ERR  
_______ DIS  
_______ TUNE  
_______ MAN  
IN2TYP  
LIN  
_______ 1-5V  
_______ LIN  
_______ 2400  
ATUNE  
INPUT2  
IN2 HI  
IN2 LO  
RATIO2  
BIAS 2  
FILTR2  
Read Only  
NONE  
_______  
0
_______ 1.00  
_______ 0.0  
_______  
1
NOTE 1: Model Number Dependent.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration  
Group  
Prompt  
Value or Factory  
Function Prompt Selection Setting  
Group  
Prompt  
Function  
Prompt  
Value or Factory  
Selection Setting  
PIDSET  
SW VAL  
LSP’S  
RSPSRC  
SP TRK  
PWR UP  
PWROUT  
SP Hi  
_______ ONE  
_______ 0.00  
_______ ONE  
_______ NONE  
_______ NONE  
_______ AUTO  
_______ FSAF  
_______ 2400  
CONTRL  
A1S1TY  
A1S1VA  
A1S1HL  
A1S1EV  
A1S2TY  
A1S2VA  
A1S2HL  
A1S2EV  
A2S1TY  
A2S1VA  
A2S1HL  
A2S1EV  
A2S2TY  
A2S2VA  
A2S2HL  
A2S2EV  
ALHYST  
ALARM1  
BLOCK  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
NONE  
90  
HIGH  
BEGN  
NONE  
90  
HIGH  
BEGN  
NONE  
90  
HIGH  
BEGN  
NONE  
90  
ALARMS  
SP Lo  
_______  
0
ACTION  
OUT Hi  
OUT Lo  
D BAND  
HYST  
FAILSF  
FSMODE  
PBorGN  
MINRPM  
_______ REV  
_______ 100  
_______  
0
_______ 2.0  
_______ 0.5  
_______ 0.0  
_______ NOL  
_______ GAIN  
_______ MIN  
HIGH  
BEGN  
0.0  
NOL  
DIS  
DIAGAL  
DIS  
AUXOUT  
ARANGE  
0 PCT  
100 PCT  
DIG IN 1  
DIG1 CMB  
DIG IN 2  
DIG2 CMB  
_______ DIS  
_______ 4-20  
DECMAL  
UNITS  
FREQ  
LWRDSP  
DISPLY  
LNGUAG  
TCDIAG  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
_______  
NONE  
F
60  
DIS  
SP  
ENGL  
DIS  
OPTION  
DISPLY  
_______  
0
_______ 100  
_______ NONE  
_______ DIS  
_______ NONE  
_______ DIS  
Ethernet  
(Accessible  
via PIE  
COMADR  
COMSTA  
IRENAB  
BAUD  
TX_DLY  
WS_FLT  
SDENAB  
SHDTIM  
SDMODE  
SHD_SP  
UNITS  
_______ Disable  
MAC Add.  
IP Address  
Subnet Mask ________  
________  
________ 10.0.0.  
- -  
COM  
_______  
0
_______ Enable  
_______ 9600  
_______ 30  
_______ FP_B  
_______ Enable  
2
Tool)  
225.22  
5.225.0  
Default Gate  
To Email  
SMTP Add.  
Alarm  
________  
________ 0.0.0.0  
________  
- -  
________ 0.0.0.0  
________  
________  
________  
________  
________  
________  
________  
_______  
0
_______ Last  
_______ LSP  
_______ PCT  
_______ 1.0  
Email Subj  
NONE  
- -  
CSRATIO  
CSP_BI  
LOOPBK  
_______  
0
_______ Disable  
88  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4 Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section gives you all the information necessary to help you monitor and operate your  
controller including an Operator Interface overview, how to lockout changes to the  
controller, entering a security code, and monitoring the displays.  
What's in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
89  
4.1 Overview  
4.2 Operator Interface  
90  
4.3 Entering A Security Code  
4.4 Lockout Feature  
90  
91  
4.5 Monitoring The Controller  
4.6 Single Display Functionality  
4.7 Start Up Procedure for Operation  
4.8 Control Modes  
93  
97  
96  
100  
101  
102  
104  
110  
110  
112  
113  
114  
115  
115  
117  
116  
118  
125  
131  
4.9 Setpoints  
4.10 Timer  
4.11 Accutune  
4.12 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression  
4.13 Using Two Sets Of Tuning Constants  
4.14 Alarm Setpoints  
4.15 Three Position Step Control Algorithm  
4.16 Setting A Failsafe Output Value For Restart After A Power Loss  
4.17 Setting Failsafe Mode  
4.18 Setpoint Rate/Ramp/Program Overview  
4.20 Setpoint Rate  
4.19 Setpoint Ramp  
4.21 Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming  
4.22 P.I.E. Tool Maintenance Screens  
4.23 Configuring your Ethernet Connection  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.2 Operator Interface  
Introduction  
Figure 4-1 is a view of the Operator Interface.  
Figure 4-1 Operator Interface  
4.3 Entering a Security Code  
Introduction  
The level of keyboard lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode. However, knowledge  
of a security code number (0 to 9999) may be required to change from one level of  
lockout to another. When a controller leaves the factory, it has a security code of 0 which  
permits changing from one lockout level to another without entering any other code  
number.  
Procedure  
If you require the use of a security code, select a number from 0001 to 9999 and enter it  
when the lockout level is configured as NONE. Thereafter, that selected number must be  
used to change the lockout level from something other than NONE.  
ATTENTION Write the number on the Configuration Record Sheet in the configuration  
section so you will have a permanent record.  
90  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Table 4-1 Procedure to Enter a Security Code  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Enter Set Up  
Mode  
Upper Display = SET UP  
Lower Display = TUNING  
Setup  
Select any Set  
Up Group  
2
3
Upper Display = 0  
Function  
Lower Display = SECUR  
Security Code  
Entry  
To enter a four digit number in the upper display  
(0001 to 9999)  
or  
This will be your security code.  
4.4 Lockout Feature  
Introduction  
The lockout feature in the UDC2500 is used to inhibit changes (via keyboard) of certain  
functions or parameters by unauthorized personnel.  
Lockout levels  
There are different levels of Lockout depending on the level of security required. These  
levels are:  
• NONE  
• CAL  
No Lockout. All groups Read/Write.  
Calibration prompts are deleted from the Setup List.  
• CONF  
Timer, Tuning, SP Ramp, and Accutune are Read/Write. All other Setup  
groups are Read only. Calibration Group is not available.  
• VIEW  
• ALL  
Timer, Tuning, and SP Ramp are Read/Write. No other parameters are  
available.  
Timer, Tuning, and SP Ramp are Read only. No other parameters are  
viewable.  
See Subsection 3.4 - Tuning Parameters Set Up Group prompts to select one of the  
above.  
Security Code (see Subsection 4.3)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Individual key lockout  
There are three keys that can be disabled to prevent unauthorized changes to the  
parameters associated with these keys. First set the “Lock” prompt to NONE.  
These keys are:  
Run  
Hold  
Key  
- you can disable the Run/Hold key for Set Point  
Programming at configuration Set Up group prompt  
“Tuning,” function prompt “RN HLD.”  
M-A  
Reset  
Key  
Key  
- you can disable the Auto/Manual key at configuration Set  
Up, group prompt “Tuning”, function prompt “AUTOMA”  
SP  
Select  
- you can disable the Set Point Select function key at  
configuration Set Up group prompt “Tuning,” function  
prompt “SP SEL.”  
See Subsection 3.4 - Tuning Parameters Set Up Group prompts to enable or disable  
these keys.  
Key error  
When a key is pressed and the prompt “Key Error” appears in the lower display, it will be  
for one of the following reasons:  
• Parameter not available or locked out  
• Not in setup mode, press SET UP key first  
• Individual key locked out.  
92  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.5 Monitoring Your Controller  
4.5.1 Annunciators  
The following annunciator functions have been provided to help monitor the controller:  
Table 4-2 Annunciators  
Annunciator  
ALM 1 2  
Indication  
A visual indication of each alarm  
Blinking 1 indicates alarm latched and needs to be acknowledged (by  
pressing the RUN/HOLD key before extinguishing when the alarm  
condition ends  
OUT 1 2  
A visual indication of the control relays  
A visual indication of the mode of the controller (Dual display model only)  
A—Automatic Mode  
A or M  
M—Manual Mode  
[None], F or C  
A visual indication of the temperature units  
[None]—No temperature unit annunciator  
F—Degrees Fahrenheit  
C—Degrees Celsius  
L or R  
A visual indication of setpoint being used  
L— Local Setpoint is active  
R— RSP or LSP 2 is active  
The upper display is used to show other annunciator functions  
TUNE—Accutuning in progress  
RUN—SP Program in progress  
HOLD—SP Program on hold  
CSP—Controlling to the Computer Setpoint  
LOOPBK—Loopback Test running  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.5.2 Viewing the operating parameters  
Press the LOWER DISPLAY key to scroll through the operating parameters listed in Table  
4-3. The lower display will show only those parameters and their values that apply to  
your specific model.  
Table 4-3 Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts  
Lower Display  
OT XX.X  
Description  
OUTPUT—Output value is percent; for Three Position Step control, this is an  
estimated motor position and shown with no decimal place.  
LOCAL SETPOINT #1—Also current setpoint when using SP Ramp.  
LOCAL SETPOINT #2  
SP XXXX  
2LXXXX  
RSXXXX  
2NXXXX  
DEXXXX  
PIDS X  
REMOTE SETPOINT  
INPUT 2  
DEVIATION—Maximum negative display is –999.9.  
TUNING PARAMETER SELECTED SET—where X is either 1 or 2.  
TIME REMAINING—Time that remains on timer in Hours.Minutes  
ELAPSED TIME—Time that has elapsed on timer in Hours.Minutes.  
SETPOINT RAMP TIME—Time remaining in the setpoint ramp in minutes.  
AUXILIARY OUTPUT  
HH.MM  
RPXXXM  
AX XXX  
SP RATE SETPOINT—Current setpoint for setpoint rate applications  
BIAS—Displays the manual reset value for algorithm PD+MR.  
TO BEGIN—Resets Setpoint Program back to beginning of the program.  
Unit is currently not in Accutune process.  
SnXXXX  
BIXXXX  
To BGn  
NoTUNE  
DoSLOW  
DoFAST  
POSXX.XX  
Accutune Slow tuning process is operating.  
Accutune Fast tuning process is operating.  
Three position  
94  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.5.3 Diagnostic Messages  
The UDC2500 performs background tests to verify data and memory integrity. If there is  
a malfunction, a diagnostic message will be shown on the lower display. In the case of  
more than one simultaneous malfunction, only the highest priority diagnostic message  
will be displayed. Table 4-4 shows the error messages in order by priority. If any of these  
diagnostic messages appear on the lower display, refer to Section 7 - Troubleshooting for  
information on how to correct the problem.  
Table 4-4 Diagnostic Messages  
Prompt  
EE FAIL  
IN1FL  
Description  
Unable to write to non-volatile memory.  
Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration.  
Two consecutive failures of input 2 integration.  
IN2FL  
Configuration Errors—Low limit greater than high limit for PV, SP, Reset, or  
Output.  
CFGERR  
Input 1 Out-of-Range  
IN1RNG  
Out-of-range criteria:  
Linear range: ± 10 % out-of-range  
Characterized range: ± 1 % out-of-range  
Input 2 Out-of-Range—Same as Input 1.  
IN2RNG  
PV LIM  
PV Out-of-Range  
PV = (PV source x PV source ratio) + PV source bias  
Failsafe — conditions for failsafe are:  
… EEROM Test Failed  
FAILSF  
… Scratch Pad RAM Test Failed  
… Configuration Test Failed  
… Field or Factory Cal Test Failed  
Check the “Status” group.  
Remote Variable Out-of-Range  
RV = (RV source x RV source ratio) + RV source bias  
RV LIM  
SEG ERR  
LOCK  
Segment Error—SP Program starting segment number is less than ending  
segment number.  
The lockout feature has been enabled to prevent unauthorized changes of  
certain functions or parameters.  
Thermocouple sensor is starting to burnout.*  
Thermocouple sensor is in imminent danger of burning out.*  
Current Output 1 is less than 3.5 mA.**  
TCWARN  
TCFAIL  
OUT1 FL  
OUT2 FL  
Current Output 2 is less than 3.5 mA.**  
*
The Thermocouple Error messages can be disabled via the TCDIAG configuration in the DISPLAY setup group.  
** The Current Output Error messages can be disabled via the DIAGAL configuration in the ALARM setup group.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
IN 1  
IN 2  
Ratio  
Bias  
Ratio  
Bias  
PV  
Source  
RSP  
Source  
PV  
Remote SP  
SP  
SP  
CONTROL  
Source  
ALGORITHM  
Local SP  
To Final  
Control  
Element  
SP  
CSP  
OUTPUT  
2SP  
XXXX  
Figure 4-2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of the UDC2500 Controller  
96  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.6 Single Display Functionality  
Introduction  
This means that the displayed value of PV, Setpoint, Setpoint2, Remote Setpoint, Input 2,  
Output, Bias, Aux Out, and Deviation will appear on the top display and a prompt  
identifying the value will appear on the bottom display.  
Access the Values  
Pressing the LOWER DISPLAY key will cycle through all applicable values (configuration  
dependent). One minute after the last press of the display key, the display will revert back  
to a configured default display. The default display is configured in the Input 1 Setup  
Group, and has three selections:  
• Active Setpoint (SP)  
• Process Variable (PR Y)  
• Process Variable with no bottom display prompt (PR n).  
Exceptions  
There are three exceptions to the above rules. The displays for PID SET, Timer and  
Setpoint Ramp will appear the same as on a dual display model and, when displaying  
Timer or Ramp values, the default display switchover feature is disabled.  
Auto-only Mode  
The single display model is Auto only mode. The Auto/Manual key has no effect on  
controller mode. As a result of this, the failsafe mode is always non-latching.  
While a failsafe condition exists, the controller output will assume the failsafe value.  
When the failsafe condition goes away, normal automatic operation continues.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Single Display Parameters  
Table 4-5 Single Display Parameters  
Lower Display Prompt  
(blank)  
Upper Display Value  
Process Variable  
Comments  
Default selection  
PV  
Process Variable  
Local Setpoint #1  
Local Setpoint #2  
Remote Setpoint  
Output  
Default selection  
Default selection  
Default selection  
Default selection  
SP  
2SP  
RSP  
OUT  
DEV  
Deviation  
2IN  
Input #2  
AUX  
Aux Output value  
PD+MR bias value  
Process Variable  
Process Variable  
Process Variable  
BIA  
PIDS x  
Active PID set  
SP Ramp time left  
Timer display  
RP xxxM  
HH.MM or MM.SS  
98  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.7 Start Up Procedure for Operation  
Table 4-6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller  
Single  
Display  
Step  
Dual  
Display  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Setup  
Result  
1
1
Configure  
controller  
Make sure the controller has been configured properly  
and that all the values and selections have been recorded  
on the Configuration Record Sheet. See steps 4 & 5.  
2
3
Select  
Manual  
Mode  
N/A for Single Display Model  
M-A  
Reset  
Until “M” indicator is ON.  
The controller is in manual mode.  
Adjust the  
Output  
N/A for Single Display Model  
To adjust the output value and ensure that the final control  
element is functioning correctly.  
or  
Upper Display = PV Value  
Lower Display = OT and the output value in %  
N/A for Single Display Model  
4
5
Select  
Automatic  
Mode  
M-A  
Reset  
Until “A” indicator is ON.  
The controller is in Automatic mode.  
The controller will automatically adjust the output to  
maintain the process variable at setpoint.  
2
Enter the  
Local  
Setpoint  
Upper Display = Pv Value  
Lower  
Display  
Lower Display = SP and the Local Setpoint Value  
To adjust the local setpoint to the value at which you want  
the process variable maintained.  
or  
The local setpoint cannot be changed if the Setpoint  
Ramp function is running.  
3
6
Tune the  
Controller  
Use Accutune to tune the controller; see product manual  
for detailed procedure or refer to Tuning Set Up group to  
set that the selections for PB or GAIN, RATE T, and I MIN  
or I RPM.  
Setup  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.8 Control Modes  
ATTENTION  
After changing a Local Setpoint value, if no other key is pressed, it then takes a minimum of thirty (30)  
seconds elapsed time before the new value is stored in non-volatile memory. If controller power is  
removed before this time, the new setpoint value is lost and the previous setpoint value is used at  
power-up. If, after changing the LSP value, another key is pressed, then the value is stored  
immediately.  
4.8.1 Mode Definitions  
Table 4-7 Control Mode Definitions  
Control Mode  
Definition  
In automatic local mode, the controller operates from the local setpoints and  
automatically adjusts the output to maintain the PV at the desired value.  
In this mode you can adjust the setpoint.  
AUTOMATIC with  
LOCAL  
SETPOINT  
See Subsection 4.9 - Setpoints.  
In automatic remote mode, the controller operates from the setpoint measured at the  
remote setpoint input. Adjustments are available to ratio this input and add a  
constant bias before it is applied to the control equation.  
AUTOMATIC with  
REMOTE  
SETPOINT  
See Subsection 3.9 or 3.10, Input 1 or Input 2.  
(optional)  
In the manual mode, the operator directly controls the controller output level. The  
process variable and the percent output are displayed. The configured High and  
Low Output Limits are disregarded and the operator can change the output value,  
using the increment and decrement keys, to the limits allowed by the output type  
(0 % to 100 % for a time proportioning output or –5 % to 105 % for a current output).  
MANUAL  
(optional)  
Manual Mode not available with Single Display model.  
100  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.8.2 What happens when you change modes  
Table 4-8 Changing Control Modes (Dual Display Only)  
Control Mode  
Definition  
The Local Setpoint is usually the value previously stored as the Local Setpoint.  
PV tracking is a configurable feature which modifies this. For this configuration,  
when the controller is in manual mode, the local setpoint value tracks the process  
variable value continuously.  
Manual to  
Automatic Local  
Setpoint  
The Remote Setpoint uses the stored ratio and bias to calculate the control  
setpoint.  
Manual or Auto  
Local to Automatic  
Remote SP  
If configured for local setpoint tracking, RSP, when the controller transfers out of  
remote setpoint the last value of the remote setpoint is inserted into the local  
setpoint.  
If LSP tracking is not configured, the local setpoint will not be altered when the  
transfer is made.  
Automatic Remote  
Setpoint to Manual  
or Auto Local  
Setpoint  
4.9 Setpoints  
Introduction  
You can configure the following setpoints for the UDC2500 controller.  
•
•
•
A Single Local Setpoint  
2 Local Setpoints  
a Local Setpoint and a Remote Setpoint  
Refer to Subsection 3.11 – Control Set Up Group for configuration details.  
Changing the Setpoints  
Table 4-9 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Until you see:  
Select the  
Setpoint  
Lower  
Display  
Upper Display = PV  
Lower Display = SP or 2L (Value)  
Change the  
Value  
To change the Local Setpoint to the value at which you want  
the process maintained. The display “blinks” if you attempt  
to enter setpoint values beyond the high and low limits..  
2
3
or  
Return to PV  
Display  
To store immediately or will store after 30 seconds.  
Lower  
Display  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Switching between setpoints  
You can switch Local and Remote setpoints or between two Local setpoints when  
configured.  
ATTENTION The REMOTE SETPOINT value cannot be changed at the keyboard.  
Table 4-10 Procedure for Switching Between Setpoints  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
To alternately select Local Setpoint 1 (LSP) and the Remote  
Setpoint (RSP) or switch between the 2 Local Setpoints  
(LSP and 2L)  
Select the  
Setpoint  
Function  
ATTENTION “KEY ERROR” will appear in the  
lower display, if:  
• the remote setpoint or 2nd local setpoint is not configured  
as a setpoint source  
• you attempt to change the setpoint while a setpoint ramp  
is enabled, or  
• if you attempt to change the setpoint with the setpoint  
select function key disabled.  
4.10 Timer  
Introduction  
The Timer provides a configurable Time-out period of from 0 to 99 hours:59 minutes or  
0 to 99 minutes:99 seconds.  
Timer “Start” is selectable as either the RUN/HOLD key or Alarm 2.  
The Timer display can be either “Time Remaining” or “Elapsed Time”.  
Configuration check  
Make sure:  
• TIMER is enabled  
• A TIMEOUT period has been selected (in hours and minutes or minutes and  
seconds)  
• A TIMER FUNCTION START has been selected (KEY or AL2)  
• A TIMER display has been selected (Time remaining or Elapsed time)  
• A timer increment selected  
• Timer reset selected  
Refer to Subsection 3.7 Algorithm Set Up Group for details.  
102  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Viewing Times  
The times are viewed on the lower display as follows:  
TIME REMAINING will show as a decreasing Hrs:Min value (HH:MM) or Min:Sec  
value (MM:SS) plus a counterclockwise rotating clock face.  
ELAPSED TIME  
will show as an increasing Hrs:Min value(HH:MM) or Min:Sec  
value (MM:SS) plus a clockwise rotating clock face.  
Operation  
When the Timer is enabled (RUN/HOLD key or ALARM 2), it has exclusive control of  
Alarm 1 relay.  
At “TIME-OUT:  
• Alarm 1 is active  
• The clock character has stopped moving  
• The Time display shows either 00:00 or the time-out period depending on the  
configuration selection  
• The Timer is ready to be reset  
At “RESET”:  
• Alarm 1 relay is inactive  
• The time display shows the time-out period  
• The time-out period can be changed at this time using the  
• The Timer is ready to be activated  
or  
keys.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.11 Accutune III  
Introduction  
Accutune III (TUNE) may be used for self-regulating and single integrating processes.  
This autotuning method is initiated on-demand, typically at initial start-up.  
There are no other requirements necessary, such as prior knowledge to the process  
dynamics or initial or post tune process line-out to setpoint or manual output.  
Also, the setpoint value is not required to change in order to initiate the tuning process,  
but the controller must be in the Automatic mode to start tuning. The process need not be  
in a static (lined out) state and may be dynamic (changing with a steady output).  
Configuration check  
Make sure:  
• TUNE has been enabled see to Subsection 3.6 - Accutune Set Up Group for details.  
Tuning indicators  
“TUNE” will flash in the upper display until tuning is completed.  
Operation  
The “TUNE” (Accutune II) algorithm provides user-friendly, on-demand tuning in this  
controller. No knowledge of the process is required at start-up. The operator simply  
initiates the tuning while in the automatic mode.  
Once Accutune III has been enabled in the TUNE setup group, either “SLOW” or  
“FAST” tuning may be used. Which one is used is selected via the lower display during  
normal operation.  
For the SLOW selection, the controller calculates conservative tuning constants with the  
objective of minimizing overshoot. If the controller determines that the process has  
appreciable dead time, it will automatically default to use Dahlin Tuning, which produces  
very conservative tuning constants. The SLOW selection may be useful for TPSC  
applications, as it reduces any “hunt” problems for the motor.  
For the FAST selection, the controller calculates aggressive tuning constants with the  
objective of producing quarter damped response. Depending upon the process, this  
selection will usually result in some overshoot. For this reason, it may be desireable to  
enable the FUZZY tune selection. See Section 4.12. When Fuzzy tune is enabled, it will  
work to suppress or eliminate any overshoot that may occur as a result of the calculated  
tuning parameters as the PV approaches the setpoint.  
The TUNE process will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles between the low and  
high output limits while allowing only a very small Process Variable change above and  
below the SP during each cycle. “TUNE” flashes in the upper display until tuning is  
completed.  
104  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
At the end of the tuning process, the controller immediately calculates the tuning  
constants and enters them into the Tuning group, and begins PID control with the correct  
tuning parameters. This works with any process, including integrating type processes,  
and allows retuning at a fixed setpoint.  
4.11.1  
Tune for Simplex Outputs  
After “TUNE” has been enabled, you can start Accutune as shown in Table 4-11.  
Table 4-11 Procedure for Starting “TUNE”  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Configure LSP1  
Until SP (Local Setpoint 1) shows  
in the lower display.  
Lower  
Display  
Until LSP1 is to the desired value.  
2
3
or  
Switch to  
“Automatic” Mode  
Until the “A” indicator is lighted (on  
controllers with Manual option).  
M-A  
Reset  
Show Tuning  
Prompt  
Until “NoTUNE” is shown on lower  
display.  
4
Lower  
Display  
Initiate Tuning  
Select “DoSLOW” or “DoFAST” in  
lower display.  
5
6
Tuning in operation  
Upper display will flash “TUNE” as  
long as ACCUTUNE process is  
operating. When process  
Lower  
Display  
completes, tuning parameters are  
calculated and lower display will  
show “NoTune” prompt.  
ATTENTION  
The Accutune process may be aborted at any time by changing the lower display back to “NoTUNE” or  
by switching the controller into Manual Mode.  
4.11.2  
Tune for Duplex (Heat/Cool)  
Accutune for applications using Duplex (Heat/Cool) control.  
The controller must be configured to have two local setpoints unless Blended Tuning is  
desired (see below). See Subsection 3.11- Control Set Up Group for details on  
configuring two local setpoints. During tuning, the Accutune III process assumes that  
Local Setpoint 1 will cause a Heating demand (output above 50%), and the tuning  
parameters calculated for that setpoint are automatically entered as PID SET 1. Likewise,  
Accutune III assumes that Local Setpoint 2 will cause a Cooling demand (output less  
than 50%), and the tuning parameters calculated for that setpoint are automatically  
entered as PID SET 2.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Configuration Check for Duplex  
See Subsection 3.6 - Accutune Set Up Group for details.  
Make sure:  
• TUNE has been enabled  
• DUPLEX has been configured to Manual, Automatic or Disabled  
4.11.3  
Using AUTOMATIC TUNE at start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool)  
Used when DUPLEX has been configured for AUTOMATIC. This is the preferred  
selection for most Heat/Cool applications when tuning a new chamber. This selection  
will sequentially perform both Heat and Cool tuning without further operator  
intervention.  
Table 4-12 Procedure for Using AUTOMATIC TUNE at Start-up for Duplex Control  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Configure LSP1  
Until SP (Local Setpoint 1) shows  
in the lower display.  
Lower  
Display  
Until LSP1 is a value within the  
Heat Zone (output above 50%).  
2
3
or  
Configure LSP2  
Until 2SP (Local Setpoint 2) shows  
in the lower display.  
Lower  
Display  
Until LSP2 is a value within the  
Cool Zone (output below 50%).  
4
5
or  
Switch to  
“Automatic” Mode  
Until the “A” indicator is lighted (on  
controllers with Manual option).  
M-A  
Reset  
Show Tuning  
Prompt  
Until “NoTUNE” is shown on lower  
display.  
6
7
Lower  
Display  
Initiate Tuning  
Select “DoSLOW” or “DoFAST” in  
lower display.  
Tuning in operation  
Upper display will flash “TUNE” as  
long as ACCUTUNE process is  
operating. When process  
Lower  
Display  
completes, tuning parameters are  
calculated and lower display will  
show “NoTune” prompt.  
4.11.4  
Using BLENDED TUNE at start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool)  
When DUPLEX has been configured for DISABLE. This is the preferred selection for  
Heat/Cool applications which use a highly insulated chamber (a chamber which will lose  
heat very slowly unless a cooling device is applied). Only one local setpoint (LSP 1) is  
needed for this selection.  
106  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
This selection results in performance tuning over the full range utilizing both Heat and  
Cool outputs to acquire blended tune values that are then applied to both Heat and Cool  
tuning parameters. Both PID sets are set to the same values.  
Table 4-13 Procedure for Using BLENDED TUNE at Start-up for Duplex Control  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Configure LSP1  
Until SP (Local Setpoint 1) shows  
in the lower display.  
Lower  
Display  
Until the Setpoint is to the desired  
value.  
2
3
or  
Switch to  
“Automatic” Mode  
Until the “A” indicator is lighted (on  
controllers with Manual option).  
M-A  
Reset  
Show Tuning  
Prompt  
Until “NoTUNE” is shown on lower  
display.  
4
Lower  
Display  
Initiate Tuning  
Select “DoSLOW” or “DoFAST” in  
lower display.  
5
6
Tuning in operation  
Upper display will flash “TUNE” as  
long as ACCUTUNE process is  
operating. When process  
Lower  
Display  
completes, tuning parameters are  
calculated and lower display will  
show “NoTune” prompt.  
4.11.5  
Using MANUAL TUNE at start-up for Duplex (Heat/Cool)  
When DUPLEX has been configured for MANUAL. This selection should be used when  
tuning is needed only for the HEAT zone or only for the COOL zone but not both. If  
Local Setpoint 1 is used, then the controller will perform a HEAT zone tune. If Local  
Setpoint 2 is used, then the controller will perform a COOL zone tune.  
Table 4-14 Procedure for Using MANUAL TUNE for Heat side of Duplex Control  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Configure LSP1  
Until SP (Local Setpoint 1) shows  
in the lower display.  
Lower  
Display  
Until LSP1 is a value within the  
Heat Zone (output above 50%).  
2
3
or  
Switch to  
“Automatic” Mode  
Until the “A” indicator is lighted (on  
controllers with Manual option).  
M-A  
Reset  
Show Tuning  
Prompt  
Until “NoTUNE” is shown on lower  
display.  
4
Lower  
Display  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Step  
5
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Initiate Tuning  
Select “DoSLOW” or “DoFAST” in  
lower display.  
Tuning in operation  
Upper display will flash “TUNE” as  
long as ACCUTUNE process is  
operating. When process  
Lower  
Display  
6
completes, tuning parameters are  
calculated and lower display will  
show “NoTune” prompt.  
Table 4-15 Procedure for Using MANUAL TUNE for Cool side of Duplex Control  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Configure LSP2  
Until 2SP (Local Setpoint 2) shows  
in the lower display.  
Lower  
Display  
Until LSP2 is a value within the  
Cool Zone (output below 50%).  
2
3
or  
Switch to  
“Automatic” Mode  
Until the “A” indicator is lighted (on  
controllers with Manual option).  
M-A  
Reset  
Show Tuning  
Prompt  
Until “NoTUNE” is shown on lower  
display.  
4
Lower  
Display  
Initiate Tuning  
Select “DoSLOW” or “DoFAST” in  
lower display.  
5
6
Tuning in operation  
Upper display will flash “TUNE” as  
long as ACCUTUNE process is  
operating. When process  
Lower  
Display  
completes, tuning parameters are  
calculated and lower display will  
show “NoTune” prompt.  
108  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.11.6  
Error Codes  
Table 4-16 Procedure for Accessing Accutune Error Codes  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Accutune  
Set-up Group  
Upper Display = SET  
Setup  
Lower Display = ATUNE  
Go to Error Code  
Prompt  
2
Upper Display = (an error code)  
Function  
Lower Display = ATERR  
Table 4-17 lists all the error codes, definitions, and  
fixes.  
Table 4-17 Accutune Error Codes  
Error Code  
(Upper Display)  
Definition  
Fix  
The Accutune process is still active (Read Only)  
None  
RUN  
ACCUTUNE RUNNING  
NONE  
IDFL  
NO ERRORS OCCURRED  
DURING LAST ACCUTUNE  
PROCEDURE  
PROCESS IDENTIFICATION  
FAILURE  
•
Illegal Values  
– try Accutune again.  
Autotune has aborted  
because an illegal value of  
GAIN, RATE, or reset was  
calculated.  
• untunable process -- contact local application  
engineer.  
Try Accutune again  
ABRT  
CURRENT ACCUTUNE  
PROCESS ABORTED  
caused by the following  
conditions:  
a. Operator changed to  
Manual mode  
b. Digital Input detected  
c. In Heat region of output  
and a Cool output calculated  
or vice versa.  
Enable LSP2 and configure the desired LSP1 and  
LSP2 setpoints.  
SP2  
LSP2 not enabled or LSP1 or  
LSP2 not in use (only applies  
to Duplex Tuning)  
Aborting Accutune  
To abort Accutune and return to the last previous operation (SP or output level), press  
M-A/RESET key to abort the Accutune process.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Completing Accutune  
When Accutune is complete, the calculated tuning parameters are stored in their proper  
memory location and can be viewed in the TUNING Set up Group, and the controller  
will control at the local setpoint using these newly calculated tuning constants.  
4.12 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression  
Introduction  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes Process Variable overshoot following a setpoint  
change or a process disturbance. This is especially useful in processes which experience  
load changes or where even a small overshoot beyond the setpoint may result in damage  
or lost product.  
How it works  
The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the  
setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to  
avoid an overshoot. There is no change to the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does  
not alter the PID tuning parameters. This feature can be independently Enabled or  
Disabled as required by the application to work with “TUNE” (On-Demand) Accutune  
III tuning algorithm.  
Configuration  
To configure this item, refer to Section 3 - Configuration:  
Set Up Group “ATUNE”  
Function Prompt “FUZZY”  
Select “ENAB”(enable) or “DIS” (disable) - Use  
or  
.
4.13 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants  
Introduction  
You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and choose the way they  
are to be switched. (Does not apply for Duplex control.)  
The sets can be:  
• keyboard selected,  
• automatically switched when a predetermined process variable value is reached,  
• automatically switched when a predetermined setpoint value is reached.  
110  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Set up Procedure  
Use the following procedure (Table 4-18) to:  
• select two sets,  
• set the switch-over value,  
• set tuning constant value for each set.  
Table 4-18 Set Up Procedure  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Control  
Set-up Group  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = SET  
Setup  
Lower Display = CONTRL  
Select PID SETS  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = (available selections)  
2
3
Function  
Lower Display = PID SETS  
Select PID SETS  
Function  
To select the type of function. Available selections are:  
or  
ONE—1 set of constants  
2 KBD—2 sets, keyboard selectable  
2 PR—2 sets, auto switch at PV value  
2 SP—2 sets, auto switch at SP value  
Set Tuning  
Values for Each  
Set  
Refer to “TUNING” Set up group, subsection 3.4 and set the  
following tuning parameters:  
4
Function  
PB or GAIN*  
RATE T*  
I MIN or I RPM*  
CYCT1 or CTIX3*  
PB2 or GAIN2**  
RATE 2T**  
I2MIN or I2RPM**  
CYC2T2 or CT2X3**  
*PIDSET1 will be used when PV or SP, whichever is  
selected, is greater than the switchover value.  
**PIDSET2 will be used when PV or SP, whichever is  
selected, is less than the switchover value.  
Set Switchover  
Value for 2PR or  
2SP Selection  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = (the switchover value)  
5
Function  
Lower Display = SW VAL  
To select the switchover value in the upper display.  
or  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Switch between two sets via keyboard (without automatic switch-over)  
Table 4-19 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Control  
Set-up Group  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = (the PV value)  
1
Function  
Lower Display = PIDS X  
(X= 1 or 2)  
To change PID SET 1 to PID SET2 or Vice Versa.  
You can use Accutune on each set.  
2
3
or  
To accept changes.  
Function  
4.14 Alarm Setpoints  
Introduction  
An alarm consists of a relay contact and an operator interface indication. The alarm relay  
is de-energized if setpoint 1 or setpoint 2 is exceeded.  
The alarm relay is energized when the monitored value goes into the allowed region by  
more than the hysteresis.  
The relay contacts can be wired for normally open (NO) energized or normally closed  
(NC) de-energized using internal jumper placement. See Table 2-3 in the Section 2 –  
Installation for alarm relay contact information.  
There are four alarm setpoints, two for each alarm. The type and state (High or Low) is  
selected during configuration. See Subsection 3.13 – Configuration for details.  
Alarm Setpoints Display  
Table 4-20 Procedure for Displaying Alarm Setpoints  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Alarm  
Set-up Group  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = SET  
1
Setup  
Lower Display = ALARMS  
Access the Alarm  
Setpoint Values  
To successively display the alarm setpoints and their values.  
Their order of appearance is shown below.  
Upper Display = (the alarm setpoint value)  
Range values are within the range of the selected  
parameters except:  
2
Function  
DEVIATION (DE) value = PV Span  
EVENTS (E-ON/E-OF) value = Event Segment Number  
PV RATE OF CHANGE (PVRT) = The amount of PV  
change in one minute in engineering units.  
LOOP BREAK ALARMS (BRAK) = The timer value may be  
changed only for controllers configured for ON/OF.  
112  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Result  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Lower Display = A1S1VA = Alarm 1, Setpoint 1  
A1S2VA = Alarm 1, Setpoint 2  
A2S1VA = Alarm 2, Setpoint 1  
A2S2VA = Alarm 2, Setpoint 2  
NOTES:  
With 3 position step control, alarms set for “output” will  
not function.  
MAN, RSP, AND FSAF selections do not have setpoint  
values.  
Change a value  
To change any alarm setpoint value in the upper display.  
3
4
or  
Return to Normal  
Display  
Lower  
Display  
4.15 Three Position Step Control Algorithm  
Introduction  
The Three Position Step Control algorithm allows the control of a valve (or other  
actuator) with an electric motor driven by two controller output relays; one to move the  
motor upscale, the other to move it downscale, without a feedback slidewire linked to the  
motor shaft.  
Estimated Motor Position  
The Three Position Step control algorithm provides an output display (“OT”) which is an  
estimated motor position since the motor is not using any feedback.  
• Although this output indication is only accurate to a few percent, it is corrected each  
time the controller drives the motor to one of its stops (0 % or 100 %).  
• It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire (wear, dirt,  
and noise).  
• When operating in this algorithm, the estimated “OT” display is shown to the nearest  
percent (that is, no decimal).  
See Motor Travel Time (the time it takes the motor to travel from 0 % to 100 %) in  
section 3.8.  
Motor Position Display  
Table 4-21 Procedure for Displaying 3Pstep Motor Position  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Access the  
Displays  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = PV  
Lower  
Display  
Lower Display = OT (The estimated motor position in %)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.16 Setting a Failsafe Output Value for Restart After a Power Loss  
Introduction  
If the power to the controller fails and power is reapplied, the controller goes through the  
power up tests, then goes to a user configured FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE.  
Set a Failsafe Value  
Table 4-22 Procedure for Setting a Failsafe Value  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Control  
Set-up Group  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = SET  
Setup  
Lower Display = CONTRL  
Select Failsafe  
Function Prompt  
You will see:  
Upper Display = (range)  
2
Function  
within the range of the Output 0 to 100 for all output types  
except 3 Position Step  
3 Position Step  
0 = motor goes to closed position  
100 = motor goes to open position  
Lower Display = FAILSF  
Select a value  
To select a failsafe output value in the upper display  
3
4
or  
Return to Normal  
Display  
At power up, the output will go to the value set.  
Lower  
Display  
114  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.17 Setting Failsafe Mode  
Introduction  
You can set the Failsafe Mode to be Latching or Non-Latching.  
Set Failsafe Mode  
Table 4-23 Procedure for Setting a Failsafe Mode  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Control  
Set-up Group  
Until you see:  
Upper Display = SET  
1
Setup  
Lower Display = CONTRL  
Select Failsafe  
Function Prompt  
You will see:  
Upper Display =  
2
Function  
LACH (Controller goes to manual and output goes to  
failsafe value)  
NO L (Controller mode does not change and output goes  
to failsafe value)  
Lower Display = FSMODE  
Select a value  
To select a failsafe mode in the upper display.  
3
4
or  
Return to Normal  
Display  
At power up, the output will go to the value set.  
Lower  
Display  
4.18 Setpoint Rate/Ramp/Program Overview  
Introduction  
The Setpoint Ramp configuration group lets you enable and configure any of the  
following:  
• SPRATE – a specific rate of change for any local setpoint change. (Subsection 4.20)  
• SPRAMP – a single setpoint ramp that occurs between the current local setpoint and  
a final local setpoint over a time interval of 1 to 255 minutes. (Subsection 4.19)  
• SPPROG – a ramp/soak profile in a 12-segment program. (Subsection 4.21)  
This section explains the operation of each selection and configuration reference where  
necessary.  
PV Hot Start  
This is a standard feature. At power-up, the setpoint is set to the current PV value and  
the Rate or Ramp or Program then starts from this value.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
RUN/HOLD key  
You can start or stop the Ramp or Program using the RUN/HOLD key.  
4.19Setpoint Ramp  
Introduction  
When you have configured a SETPOINT RAMP, the ramp will occur between the  
current local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to 255  
minutes. You can RUN or HOLD the ramp at any time.  
Configuration Check  
Make sure  
• SPRAMP is enabled  
• A Ramp Time (TIMIN) in minutes has been configured  
• A final setpoint value (FINLSP) has been configured. See Subsection 3.5 –  
Configuration group “SPRAMP” for details.  
Operation  
Running a Setpoint Ramp includes starting, holding, viewing the ramp, ending the ramp  
and disabling it. See Table 4-24.  
Table 4-24 Running A Setpoint Ramp  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select Automatic  
Mode  
“A” indicator is on.  
M-A  
Reset  
Upper Display = Hold and PV value  
Lower Display = SP and Present value  
Until start SP value is in lower display  
Set Start Setpoint  
Start the Ramp  
2
3
Lower  
Display  
Upper Display = Hold and PV value  
Lower Display = SP and start SP value  
You will see  
Run  
Upper Display = Run and a changing PV value  
Lower Display = SP and a changing SP value increasing  
or decreasing toward a final SP value  
Hold  
Hold/Run the  
Ramp  
This holds the ramp at the current setpoint value. Press  
again to continue.  
4
5
Run  
Hold  
Until you see  
Upper Display = RUN or HOLD and the PV value  
Lower Display = RP xx HH.MM (time remaining)  
View the  
remaining ramp  
time  
Lower  
Display  
116  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Result  
Step  
6
Operation  
Press  
When the final setpoint is reached, “RUN” changes to  
“HOLD” in the upper display and the controller operates  
at the new final setpoint.  
End the Ramp  
See Section 3 – Configuration group “SPRAMP” for  
details.  
Disable SPRAMP  
7
Power Outage  
If power is lost during a ramp, upon power-up the controller will be in HOLD and the  
setpoint value will be the setpoint value prior to the beginning of the setpoint ramp.  
The ramp is placed in hold at the beginning.  
Configure the mode at Set Up Group “CONTROL”, function prompt “PWRUP”. See  
Subsection 3.11 – CONTRL GROUP FUNCTION Prompts.  
4.20Setpoint Rate  
Introduction  
When you have configured a SETPOINT RATE, it will apply immediately to local  
setpoint change.  
Configuration check  
Make sure:  
• SPRATE is enabled  
• SP RATE and SPPROG are not running.  
• A Rate Up (EUHRUP) or Rate Down (EUHRDN) value has been configured in  
Engineering units per hour.  
ATTENTION  
A value of 0 will imply an immediate change in setpoint, that is, NO RATE applies. See  
Subsection 3.5 – Configuration group “SPRAMP” for details.)  
Operation  
When a change to local setpoint is made, this controller will ramp from the original  
setpoint to the “target” setpoint at the rate specified.  
The current setpoint value can be viewed at Sn on the lower display.  
Power outages  
If power is lost before the “target” setpoint is reached, upon power recovery, the  
controller powers up with Sn = Current PV value and it automatically “Restarts” from Sn  
= current PV value up to the original “target” setpoint.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.21 Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming  
Introduction  
The term “programming” is used here to identify the process for selecting and entering  
the individual ramp and soak segment data needed to generate the required setpoint  
versus time profile (also called a program).  
A segment is a ramp or soak function which together make up a setpoint program.  
Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming lets you configure six ramp and six soak segments to  
be stored for use as one program or several small programs. You designate the beginning  
and end segments to determine where the program is to start and stop.  
Review program data and configuration  
While the procedure for programming is straightforward, and aided by prompts, we  
suggest you read “Program Contents”. Table 4-25 lists the program contents and an  
explanation of each to aid you in configuration. Then refer to Subsection 3.5 –  
Configuration to do the setpoint program.  
Make sure SPRATE and SPRAMP are disabled.  
Fill out the worksheet  
Refer to the example in Figure 4-3 and draw a Ramp/Soak Profile on the worksheet  
provided (Figure 4-4) and fill in the information for each segment. This will give you a  
record of how the program was developed.  
Operation  
Refer to Table 4-26 Run/Monitor the program.  
Program Contents  
Table 4-25 lists all the program contents and a description of each.  
Table 4-25 Program Contents  
Contents  
Definition  
A ramp segment is the time or rate of change it takes to change the setpoint  
to the next setpoint value in the program.  
Ramp time or rate  
segments  
• Ramps are odd number segments. Segment #1 will be the initial ramp time.  
• Ramp time is determined in either:  
TIME* - Hours:Minutes  
or  
Range = 0-99 hr.:59 min.  
EU-M* - Degrees/Minute Range = 0 to 999  
EU-H* - Degrees/Hour  
*The selection of time or rate is made at prompt “RP UNIT”  
- Set this prompt before entering any Ramp information.  
118  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Contents  
Definition  
ATTENTION Entering “0” will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to  
the next soak.  
The ramp unit selection determines the engineering units for the ramp  
segments.  
Ramp unit  
The selections are:  
• TIME = Hours:Minutes (XX:XX) Range: 0-99 hr.:0-59 min  
• EU-H = Degrees/Hour OR EU-M = Degrees/Minute (Range – 0-999)  
A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint (value) and a soak duration  
(time).  
Soak segments  
•
•
•
Soaks are even number segments.  
Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time.  
The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low  
range limits in engineering units.  
•
Soak time is the duration of the soak and is determined in:  
TIME - Hours:Minutes  
Range = 0-99 hr.:59 min.  
The start segment number designates the number of the first segment.  
Range = 1 to 11  
Start segment  
number  
The end segment number designates the number of the last segment, it must  
be a soak segment (even number). Range = 2 to 12  
End segment number  
The recycle number allows the program to recycle a specified number of  
times from beginning to end. Range = 0 to 99  
Recycle number  
All soak segments can have a deviation value of from 0 to ± 99 (specified by  
SOK DEV) which guarantees the value for that segment.  
Guaranteed soak  
Guaranteed soak deviation values >0 guarantee that the soak segment’s  
process variable is within the ± deviation for the configured soak time.  
Whenever the ± deviation is exceeded, soak timing is frozen.  
There are no guaranteed soaks whenever the deviation value is configured to  
0, (that is, soak segments start timing soak duration as soon as the soak  
setpoint is first reached, regardless of where the process variable remains  
relative to the soak segment).  
The soak deviation value is the number in engineering units, above or below  
the setpoint, outside of which the timer halts. The range is 0 to ± 99.  
The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection.  
PV Start  
This function determines whether LSP1 or PV is used as the setpoint when  
the program is initially changed from HOLD to RUN.  
The selections are:  
DISABL = When the program is initially changed from HOLD to RUN the  
present LSP1 value is captured as the default setpoint. If the  
program is terminated or the power cycled before the program has  
completed, the LSP1 is used as the control setpoint. The  
beginning segment uses this value as the initial ramp setpoint.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Contents  
Definition  
ENABL = When the program is initially changed from HOLD to RUN the  
present PV value is captured and used as the beginning setpoint  
value for the ramp segment. If the program is terminated before  
completion, the setpoint value will revert back to the PV value  
captured at the initial HOLD to RUN transition. If the power is  
cycled before program completion, upon power-up the setpoint is  
set to the PV value at power-up and when the program is restarted  
that setpoint value is used initially.  
The program state selection determines the program state after completion.  
The selections are:  
Program state  
• DIS = program is disabled (so program value changed to DIS)  
• HOLD = program on hold  
The program termination state function determines the status of the controller  
upon completion of the program.  
Program termination  
state  
The selections are:  
• LAST = controls to last setpoint  
• FSAF = manual mode and failsafe output.  
When enabled, this selection allows you to reset the program to the beginning  
from the keyboard.  
Reset Program to  
Beginning  
Ramp/soak profile example  
Before you perform the actual configuration, we recommend that you draw a Ramp/Soak  
profile in the space provided on the “Program Record Sheet” (Figure 4-4) and fill in the  
associated information. An example of a Ramp-Soak Profile is shown in Figure 4-3.  
Start setpoint is at 200 degrees F.  
120  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Setpoint  
500  
SEG 8  
SEG 9  
SEG 4  
400  
°F  
SG 10  
SEG 7  
SEG 5  
SEG 3  
F
SG 11  
SEG 2  
300  
SEG 6  
SEG 1  
SG 12  
200  
Time/Hours  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17  
20765  
Figure 4-3 Ramp/Soak Profile Example  
Ramp/Soak Profile Example  
Prompt  
Function  
Segment  
Value  
1
Prompt  
SG4 TI  
SG5 RP  
SG6 SP  
Function  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
Segment  
Value  
STRSEG Start Seg.  
ENDSEG End Seg.  
4
5
6
1 hr.  
1 hr.:30 min.  
250  
12  
RP UNIT Engr. Unit for  
TIME  
Ramp  
PG END Controller  
LAST SP  
HOLD  
DIS  
SG6 TI  
SG7 RP  
SG8 SP  
SG8 TI  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
6
7
3 hr.:0 min.  
2 hr.:30 min.  
500  
Status  
STATE  
Controller  
State at end  
TO BEGIN Reset SP  
8
Program  
PVSTRT Program starts  
DIS  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
8
0 hr.:30 min.  
0
at PV value  
RECYCL Number of  
2
SG9 RP  
SG10 SP  
9
Recycles  
SOKDEV Deviation  
0
10  
400  
Value  
SG1 RP  
SG2 SP  
SG2 TI  
SG3 RP  
SG4 SP  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
1
2
2
3
4
1 hr.  
300  
SG10 TI  
SG11 RP  
SG12 SP  
SG12TI  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
10  
11  
12  
12  
0 hr.:30 min.  
3 hr.:30 min.  
200  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
1 hr.:30 min.  
1 hr.  
Soak Time  
0 hr.:30 min.  
400  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Program record sheet  
Draw your ramp/soak profile on the record sheet shown in Figure 4-4 and fill in the  
associated information in the blocks provided. This will give you a permanent record of  
your program and will assist you when entering the Setpoint data.  
Figure 4-4 Program Record Sheet  
Prompt  
Function  
Segment  
Value  
Prompt  
SG4 TI  
SG5 RP  
SG6 SP  
Function  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
Segment  
Value  
STRSEG Start Seg.  
ENDSEG End Seg.  
4
5
6
RP UNIT Engr. Unit for  
Ramp  
RECYCL Number of  
SEG6 TI Soak Time  
6
Recycles  
SOKDEV Deviation Value  
SG7 RP  
SG8 SP  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
7
8
PG END Controller  
Status  
STATE  
Program  
Controller State  
SG8 TI  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
8
9
TO BEGIN Reset SP  
SG9 RP  
Program  
PVSTRT Program starts  
SG10 SP Soak SP  
10  
at PV value  
SG1 RP  
SG2 SP  
SG2 TI  
SG3 RP  
SG4 SP  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
1
2
2
3
4
SG10 TI  
SG11RP  
SG12SP  
SG12TI  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
10  
11  
12  
12  
Soak Time  
Ramp Time  
Soak SP  
Soak Time  
122  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Run/Monitor the program  
Prior to running the program, make sure all the “SP PROG” function prompts under the  
Set Up group “SP RAMP” have been configured with the required data.  
“HOLD” appears periodically in the upper display indicating that the program is in the  
HOLD state.  
ATTENTION SP Programmer parameter cannot be changed during RUN state (must be  
in HOLD state).  
Run/Monitor functions  
Table 4-26 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program.  
Table 4-26 Run/Monitor Functions  
Function  
Press  
Result  
Set the Local  
Setpoint  
Upper Display = PV value  
Lower Display = SP  
Lower  
Display  
To set the Local Setpoint value to where you  
want the program to start out.  
or  
Run State  
Hold State  
Initiates the setpoint program.  
Run  
Hold  
“RUN” appears in the upper display indicating  
that the program is running.  
Holds the setpoint program.  
Run  
Hold  
“HOLD” appears in the upper display  
indicating that the program is in the HOLD  
state.  
The setpoint holds at the current setpoint.  
External Hold  
If one of the Digital Inputs is programmed for  
the HOLD function, then contact closure  
places the controller in the HOLD state, if the  
setpoint program is running.  
The upper display will periodically show  
“HOLD” while the switch is closed.  
ATTENTION The keyboard takes priority  
over the external switch for the RUN/HOLD  
function.  
Reopening the HOLD switch runs the  
program.  
To Begin  
To go back to the beginning of the program.  
or  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Function  
Press  
Result  
Viewing the present  
ramp or soak  
Upper Display = PV value  
Lower Display = XXHH.MM  
Lower  
Display  
segment number  
and time  
Time remaining in the SEGMENT in hours and  
minutes. XX = The current number, 1 to 12.  
until you see  
Viewing the number  
of cycles left in the  
program  
Upper Display = PV value  
Lower Display = REC_XX  
Lower  
Display  
Number of cycles remaining in the setpoint  
program. X = 0 to 99  
until you see  
End Program  
When the final segment is completed, the  
“RUN” in the upper display either changes to  
“HOLD” (if configured for HOLD state), or  
disappears (if configured for disable of setpoint  
programming).  
• The controller either operates at the last  
setpoint in the program or goes into manual  
mode/failsafe output.  
Disable Program  
See Section 3 – Configuration Group  
“SPPROG” for details.  
Power outage  
ATTENTION If power is lost during a program, upon power-up the controller will be in  
hold and the setpoint value will be the setpoint value prior to the beginning of the  
setpoint program. The program is placed in hold at the beginning. The mode will be as  
configured under “PWR UP” in the “CONTROL” group.  
Digital input (remote switch) operation  
Program can be placed in RUN or HOLD state through a remote dry contact connected to  
optional digital input terminals, as follows:  
RUN—contact closure places Program in RUN state, OR  
HOLD—contact closure places Program in HOLD state  
Opening the contact will cause the Controller to revert to its original state.  
124  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.22 P.I.E. Tool Maintenance Screens  
Introduction  
This controller uses special P.I.E. Tool® Maintenance Screens which allow remote access  
and access to functions not accessible via the controller’s display and keyboard. The  
figures in this section show screen-shots of the Maintenance Screens from the PC version  
of the P.I.E. Tool®. Pocket PC Maintenance Screens are generally similar in format but  
smaller.  
ATTENTION  
Your instrument may not have all of the screens and parameters shown in this section.  
Loop Data  
Select Loop Data from the Maintenance Data menu.  
Figure 4-5 Maintenance Data Menu  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Figure 4-6 Loop Data Maintenance Screen  
The Loop Data screen allows you to see the current status of the process loop. The OP1,  
OP2 and OP3 windows indicate the status of the current outputs. If a current output is  
not installed, the OP status for that output is always OK.  
The Alarms and Digital Inputs buttons allow you to see the current status of each alarm  
setpoint and digital input.  
126  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Loop Data – Alarm Details  
This screen appears when you click on the Alarm button on the Loop Data Maintenance  
Screen and shows the status of each alarm setpoint. NONE in the Type column indicates  
that the alarm is disabled. Highlighted alarms are currently active. An asterisk (*)  
indicates that the alarm has changed state since the last communications transaction.  
For this instrument, the Alarm On and Alarm Off columns will always be blank.  
See Section 3.14 for other information about configuring Alarms.  
Figure 4-7 Alarm Details Maintenance Screen  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Loop Data – Digital Input Details  
This screen appears when you click on the Digital Inputs button on the Loop Data  
Maintenance Screen and shows the status of each Digital Input. NONE in the Type  
column indicates that the Digital Input is disabled. Highlighted Digital Inputs are  
currently active. An asterisk (*) indicates that the alarm has changed state since the last  
communications transaction.  
This instrument has a maximum of two Digital Inputs. Digital Inputs 3 through 8 will  
always appear as NONE.  
Figure 4-8 Digital Input Details Screen  
128  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Status Data  
Select Status Data from the Maintenance Data menu.  
The Status Data screen lets you see the current status of the controller’s diagnostics. If  
the controller has detected a problem, this screen will show the detected problem.  
Figure 4-9 Status Data Maintenance Screen  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Ethernet Status  
Select Ethernet Status from the Maintenance Data menu.  
This screen only appears in instruments that have the Ethernet Communications option.  
Essentially, this screen shows the same Ethernet diagnostic messages as available on the  
controller via the lower display window. See Section 7.5 for details.  
The Ethernet Status screen shows the network status of the Ethernet Link. This may be  
accessed either via Ethernet or via Infrared communications. Not all diagnostic messages  
are available via Ethernet Communications. For example, if the Ethernet cable is  
unplugged, then the instrument cannot send up the EUNPLGED diagnostic message via  
Ethernet.  
Figure 4-10 Ethernet Status Maintenance Screen  
130  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
4.23 Configuring your Ethernet Connection  
Introduction  
This controller is shipped from the factory with the address for Infrared (IR)  
communications set to 3, the Ethernet IP Address set to 10.0.0.2, the Ethernet Subnet  
Mask set to 255.255.255.0 and the Ethernet Default Gateway set to 0.0.0.0. Consult your  
Information Technologies (IT) representative as to how these should be configured for  
your installation. The MAC address is printed on the product label located on the  
instrument’s case.  
Only the P.I.E. Tool® can be used to configure Ethernet parameters. The figures in this  
section show screen-shots from the PC version of the P.I.E. Tool® Screens. Pocket PC  
Screens are generally similar in format but smaller. The P.I.E. Tool can connect to your  
controller via either Ethernet communications port or the Infrared (IR) communications  
port.  
Configuring the Controller via Infrared Communications  
If connecting via IR and assuming that the instrument’s IR address has not been changed  
from its factory setting of 3, then configure your Communications Type as Infrared and  
your IR address to 3 as shown below in Figure 4-11.  
Figure 4-11 IR Communications Address  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Close the IR configuration window and then single click on the Online Configuration  
button shown in Figure 4-12.  
Figure 4-12 Online Configuration  
Press any button on the controller’s keyboard to activate the controller’s IR port. Point  
your IR dongle (if using PC) or your Pocket PC’s IR port (if using Pocket PC) at the IR  
window on the front of the controller and then click on the Start button. The P.I.E. Tool®  
should start uploading the configuration information from the controller as shown below:  
Figure 4-13 Configuration Upload in Progress  
Once the upload is complete, click on the Ethernet & Email Group. Configure your  
Ethernet and Email parameters per Section 3.16.  
Once you have changed the Ethernet settings and downloaded them to your controller,  
you will now be able to communicate with it via Ethernet.  
132  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Configuring the Controller via Ethernet Communications  
WARNING  
Configuring the Controller via Ethernet Communications requires that you change your PC’s IP  
settings. If you have never done this before, then it is strongly recommended that you consult  
with your Information Technologies (IT) representative before proceeding.  
First, write down the current Local Area Network (LAN) configuration values for your  
PC for its IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway settings. Put these someplace  
that you can find them later.  
Connecting to the Ethernet Port in the Controller requires that you have either an  
Ethernet crossover cable or a MDI-compliant Switch or Hub available with a straight-  
through cable. The crossover cable can be used to directly connect your PC to the  
Controller while the Switch or Hub can be used to connect your PC and Controller to the  
Hub or Switch via straight-through cables.  
Once you have made an Ethernet connection between your PC and the controller, then  
change the Local Area Network (LAN) settings on your PC to be as follows:  
IP Address:  
10.0.0.3  
Subnet Mask:  
255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway: 10.0.0.1  
Now open your P.I.E. Tool® program and select PC Comm Setup and select Ethernet as  
your Communication Type as shown in Figure 4-14.  
Figure 4-14 Ethernet Communications Type Selection  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Now set your Ethernet address to 10.0.0.2 as shown in Figure 4-15.  
Figure 4-15 Ethernet Communications Address  
Close the Ethernet configuration window and then single click on the Online  
Configuration button.  
Then, click on the Start button. The P.I.E. Tool® should start uploading the  
configuration information from the controller as shown in Figure 4-16.  
134  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Operating the Controller  
Figure 4-16 Configuration Upload in Progress  
Once the upload is complete, click on the Ethernet & Email Group. Configure your  
Ethernet and Email parameters per Section 3.16.  
Once you have changed the Ethernet settings and downloaded them to your controller,  
you will no longer be able to communicate with it until you change the IP address in the  
P.I.E. Tool® to be per the controller’s new IP Address.  
You will also need to re-configure the Local Area Network (LAN) settings on your PC  
back to their original settings. On some PCs and LANs, it is possible to simply allow the  
PC to get these settings automatically via the DHCP server. Contact your Information  
Technologies (IT) representative to see if this is available on your PC.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
5 Input Calibration  
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD  
INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND  
SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN  
ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.  
5.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section describes the field calibration procedures for Input 1 and Input 2.  
• All input actuations in every UDC2500 controller are fully factory-calibrated and are  
ready for configuration by the user.  
• Field Calibration can improve the accuracy of the Controller if necessary for a  
particular application.  
CAUTION  
The field calibration will be lost if a change in input type configuration is implemented at a later  
time. The original factory calibration data remains available for later use after a field calibration  
is done. See subsection 0 if you want to restore factory calibration values.  
What's in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
136  
5.1 Overview  
5.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values  
5.3 Preliminary Information  
5.4 Input #1 Set Up Wiring  
5.5 Input #1 Calibration Procedure  
5.6 Input #2 Set Up Wiring  
5.7 Input #2 Calibration Procedure  
5.8 Restore Factory Calibration  
137  
139  
140  
144  
146  
147  
149  
136  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Calibration Steps  
Use the following steps when calibrating an input.  
Step  
Action  
Find the minimum and maximum range values for your PV input range from Table 5-1.  
Disconnect the field wiring and find out what equipment you will need to calibrate.  
1
2
3
Wire the calibrating device to your controller according to the set up wiring instructions  
for your particular input (Subsection 5.4 or 5.6).  
Follow the calibration procedure given for Input #1 or Input #2 (Subsection 5.5 or 5.7).  
4
5.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values  
Select the Range Values  
Calibrate the controller for the minimum (0 %) and maximum (100 %) range values of  
your particular input type. Two input controllers will need to have each input calibrated  
separately.  
Select the Voltage, Current or Resistance equivalents for 0 % and 100 % range values  
from Table 5-1 and Table 5-2. Use these values when calibrating your controller.  
Table 5-1 Voltage, Milliamp and Resistance Equivalents for Input 1 Range Values  
Sensor Type  
PV Input Range  
Range Values  
°F  
°C  
0 %  
100 %  
Thermocouples  
(per ITS-90)  
0 to 3300  
–454 to 1832  
–200 to 1100  
0 to 1600  
20 to 900  
–18 to 1816  
–270 to 1000  
–129 to 593  
–18 to 871  
–7 to 482  
–0.100 mV  
–9.835 mV  
–6.472 mV  
–0.886 mV  
–0.334 mV  
–0.334 mV  
–0.692 mV  
–1.114 mV  
–1.114 mV  
0.000 mV  
13.769 mV  
76.373 mV  
44.455 mV  
50.060 mV  
26.400 mV  
15.650 mV  
52.952 mV  
26.978 mV  
16.350 mV  
71.773 mV  
31.825 mV  
47.513 mV  
28.455 mV  
20.281 mV  
B
E
E (low)  
J
J (med)  
J (low)  
20 to 550  
–7 to 288  
0 to 2400  
–18 to 1816  
–29 to 649  
–29 to 399  
0 to1371  
K
–20 to 1200  
–20 to 750  
32 to 2500  
32 to 1260  
0 to 2372  
0 to 1472  
0 to 3100  
K (med)  
K (low)  
NiMo-NiCo (NM90)  
NM90 (low)  
Nicrosil-Nisil (Nic)  
Nic (low)  
R
0 to 682  
0.000 mV  
–18 to1300  
–18 to 800  
–18 to1704  
–0.461 mV  
-0.461 mV  
–0.090 mV  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Sensor Type  
PV Input Range  
Range Values  
°F  
°C  
0 %  
100 %  
0 to 3100  
-300 to 700  
-200 to 500  
0 to 4200  
–18 to1704  
–184 to 371  
–129 to 260  
–18 to 2315  
–18 to 1227  
0 to1880  
–0.092 mV  
–5.341 mV  
–4.149 mV  
–0.234 mV  
–0.234 mV  
0.000 mV  
–1.54 mV  
17.998 mV  
19.097 mV  
12.574 mV  
37.075 mV  
22.283 mV  
4.933 mV  
4.62 mV  
S
T
T (low)  
W5W26  
W5W26 (low)  
RP20-RP40  
0 to 2240  
32 to 3216  
–50 to 150  
–46 to 66  
Thermocouple  
Differential *  
Honeywell  
Radiamatic  
0 to 3400  
0 to 3400  
–18 to 1871  
–18 to 1871  
0.00 mV  
0.00 mV  
57.12 mV  
60.08 mV  
Type RH  
Type RI **  
RTD  
Alpha = 0.00385 per  
IEC-60751 (1995)  
–300 to 1200  
–300 to 300  
–300 to 1200  
–300 to 1200  
–184 to649  
–184 to149  
–184 to649  
–184 to649  
25.202 ohms  
25.202 ohms  
50.404 ohms  
126.012 ohms  
329.289 ohms  
156.910 ohms  
658.578 ohms  
1646.445 ohms  
100 ohms  
100 ohms (low)  
200 ohms  
500 ohms  
Linear  
4 to 20 mA  
0 to 20 mA  
4.00 mA  
0.00 mA  
20.00 mA  
20.00 mA  
Milliamps  
0 to 10 mV  
0 to 50 mV  
0 to 100 mV  
0.00 mV  
0.00 mV  
0.00 mV  
10.00 mV  
50.00 mV  
100.00 mV  
Millivolts  
Volts  
1 to 5 Volts  
0 to 5 Volts  
0 to 10 Volts  
1.00 Volts  
0.00 Volts  
0.00 Volts  
5.00 Volts  
5.00 Volts  
10.00 Volts  
* The Factory Calibrated millivolt values for the Thermocouple Differential Input are for a pair  
of J thermocouples at an ambient temperature mean of 450°F / 232°C. Other thermocouple  
types and ambient temperature means may be accomplished via Field Calibration of the input,  
with the range value limits being –4 mV to +16 mV for the zero and span values.  
** The range values for Radiamatic Type RI are customer configurable within the limits shown.  
138  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Calibration  
Table 5-2 Voltage and Milliamp Equivalents for Input 2 Range Values  
Sensor Type  
PV Input Range  
Range Values  
0 %  
100 %  
Linear  
4 to 20 mA  
0 to 20 mA  
4.00 mA  
0.00 mA  
20.00 mA  
20.00 mA  
Milliamps  
1 to 5 Volts  
0 to 5 Volts  
0 to 2 Volts  
1.00 Volts  
0.00 Volts  
0.00 Volts  
5.00 Volts  
5.00 Volts  
2.00 Volts  
Volts  
5.3 Preliminary Information  
Disconnect the Field Wiring  
Tag and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input (#1 or #2) terminals on the  
rear of the controller.  
mA+  
R
+
_
25 R  
26 +  
27 –  
22 mA+  
23 V+  
24 –  
Input 2  
Connections  
Input 1  
Connections  
Volt+  
_
Input 1  
Input 2  
XXXX  
Figure 5-1 Input 1 and Input 2 Wiring Terminals  
Equipment Needed  
Table 5-3 lists the equipment you will need to calibrate the specific types of inputs that  
are listed in the table. You will need a screwdriver to connect these devices to your  
controller.  
Table 5-3 Equipment Needed  
Type of Input  
Equipment Needed  
Thermocouple  
Inputs (Ice Bath)  
•
•
•
A calibrating device with at least ± 0.02 % accuracy for use as a  
signal source such as a millivolt source.  
Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of  
thermocouple that will be used with the controller input.  
Two insulated copper leads for connecting the thermocouple  
extension wire from the ice baths to the mV source.  
•
•
Two containers of crushed ice.  
Thermocouple  
Inputs (T/C Source)  
A calibrating device with at least ± 0.02 % accuracy for use as a  
signal source such as a millivolt source.  
•
Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of  
thermocouple that will be used with controller input.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Type of Input  
Equipment Needed  
RTD (Resistance  
Thermometer  
Device)  
•
•
A decade box, with at least ± 0.02 % accuracy, capable of providing  
stepped resistance values over a minimum range of 0 to 1650 ohms  
with a resolution of 0.001 ohm.  
Three insulated copper leads of equal length for connecting the  
decade box to the controller.  
Milliampere,  
Millivolt, Volts, and  
Radiamatic  
•
•
A calibrating device with at least ± 0.02 % accuracy for use as a  
signal source.  
Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the  
controller.  
•
•
Place current source at zero before switching ON.  
Do not switch current sources OFF/ON while connected to the  
UDC2500 input.  
5.4 Input 1 Set Up Wiring  
Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath  
Refer to Figure 5-2 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table  
5-4..  
Table 5-4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs  
Using an Ice Bath  
Step  
Action  
Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.  
1
2
Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper lead and  
insert the junction points into the ice bath.  
Connect the thermocouple extension wires to the terminals for Input #1.  
See Figure 5-2.  
3
+
_
+
_
26  
27  
Millivolt  
Source  
Ice Bath  
Thermocouple  
Extension Wire  
Copper Leads  
Figure 5-2 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath  
140  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Thermocouple Inputs Using a Thermocouple Source  
Refer to Figure 5-3 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table  
5-5..  
Table 5-5 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs using  
Thermocouple Source  
Step  
Action  
Connect the thermocouple extension wires to the terminals for Input #1 as shown in  
Figure 5-3.  
1
+
_
+
_
Thermocouple  
Source  
26  
27  
Thermocouple  
Extension Wire  
Figure 5-3 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using  
Thermocouple Source  
RTD Inputs  
Refer to Figure 5-4 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 5-6.  
Table 5-6 Set Up Wiring Procedure for RTD Inputs  
Step  
1
Action  
Connect the copper leads from the calibrator to the Input #1 terminals as shown in  
Figure 5-4.  
25R  
Decade  
26+  
27-  
Resistance  
Box  
Copper Leads  
Equal Length  
Figure 5-4 Wiring Connections for RTD (Resistance Thermometer Device)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Radiamatic, Millivolts, Volts or Thermocouple Differential Inputs  
Refer to Figure 5-5 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 5-7.  
Table 5-7 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Radiamatic, Millivolts, Volts or  
Thermocouple Differential Inputs (Except 0-10 Volts)  
Step  
Action  
Connect the copper leads from the calibrator to the Input #1 terminals as shown in  
Figure 5-5.  
1
Place current/voltage source at zero before switching on.  
2
3
Do not switch current/voltage source ON/OFF while connected to the instrument.  
ATTENTION  
For Radiamatic inputs only, set Emissivity value to 1.0. See Subsection 3.9 – Configuration Set  
Up prompt INPUT1, function prompt EMISS.  
Millivolt or  
Volt Source  
26+  
27-  
+
_
Figure 5-5 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Thermocouple Differential,  
Millivolts or Volts (Except 0 to 10 Volts)  
142  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
0 to 10 Volts  
Refer to Figure 5-6 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 5-8.  
Table 5-8 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 to 10 Volts  
Step  
1
Action  
Connect the copper leads from the calibrator to the Input #1 terminals as shown in  
Figure 5-6.  
Place voltage source at zero before switching on.  
2
3
Do not switch voltage source ON/OFF while connected to the instrument.  
+
1
2
3
Volt  
Source  
100K pair  
26+  
27-  
_
Figure 5-6 Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volts  
Milliamperes  
Refer to Figure 5-5 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 5-7.  
Table 5-9 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Milliampere Inputs  
Step  
1
Action  
Connect the copper leads from the calibrator to the Input #1 terminals as shown in  
Figure 5-7.  
Place current source at zero before switching on.  
2
3
Do not switch current source ON/OFF while connected to the instrument.  
+
26+  
27-  
Milliampere  
Source  
250 ohms  
_
Figure 5-7 Wiring Connections for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Inputs  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
5.5 Input 1 Calibration Procedure  
Preliminary Steps  
• Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 30 minutes before you calibrate.  
• Please read Subsection 5.4 – Input 1 Set Up Wiring before beginning the procedure.  
• Make sure you have LOCK set to NONE. See Subsection 3.4 - Tuning Set Up  
Group.  
• See Table 5-1 for Voltage vs. Resistance equivalents or 0 % and 100 % range values.  
CAUTION  
For linear inputs, avoid step changes in inputs. Vary smoothly from initial value to final 100 % value.  
Procedure  
The calibration procedure for Input #1 is listed in Table 5-10. The numeric codes are also  
listed.  
Table 5-10 Input 1 Calibration Procedure (Numeric Code 10000)  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Enter Calibration  
Mode  
Upper Display = CAL ( - - - - )  
Lower Display = INPUT1 (10000)  
Setup  
until you see  
You will see:  
Function  
Upper Display = DIS ( 0 )  
Lower Display = CALIN1 (10001)  
The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see:  
Upper Display = BEGN ( 1 )  
Lower Display = CALIN1 (10001)  
At the completion of the sequence, the selection  
automatically reverts to disable.  
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
2
Function  
Upper Display = APLY ( 2 )  
Lower Display = IN1ZRO (10002)  
•
•
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal  
to the 0 % range value for your particular input sensor.  
See Table 5-1 for Voltage, Degrees, or Resistance  
equivalents for 0 % range values.  
Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.  
144  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Step  
3
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Calibrate 100 %  
You will see:  
Function  
Upper Display = APLY ( 2 )  
Lower Display = IN1SPN (10003)  
•
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal  
to the 100 % range value for your particular input  
sensor. See Table 5-1 for Voltage, Degrees, or  
Resistance equivalents for 100 % range values.  
•
Wait 15 seconds, and  
If …  
Then …  
you are calibrating a Thermocouple input go to step 4  
you are calibrating other than a  
Thermocouple input  
go to step 5  
Check the Cold  
Junction  
The calculations for zero and span are now stored and you  
will see:  
4
Function  
Temperature  
Upper Display = The cold junction temperature at the rear  
terminals  
Lower Display = CJTEMP (10004)  
The value in the upper display is in tenths of a degree. It is  
the current reading of the temperature as measured at the  
thermocouple terminals and recognized by the controller.  
You can change this value, if it is in error, using the  
or  
keys.  
WARNING: The accuracy of the controller is directly  
affected by the accuracy of this value. It is recommended  
that this value not be changed under normal circumstances.  
Exit the  
Calibration Mode  
The controller stores the calibration constants and exits the  
calibration mode.  
5
Function  
then  
Lower  
Display  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Input Calibration  
5.6 Input 2 Set Up Wiring  
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Inputs – Input 2  
Refer to Figure 5-8 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table  
5-13.  
Table 5-11 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Inputs –  
Input 2  
Step  
Action  
Connect the copper leads from the calibrator to the Input #2 terminals as shown in  
Figure 5-8.  
1
Place current source at zero before switching on.  
2
3
Do not switch current source ON/OFF while connected to the instrument.  
+
_
25+  
Current  
Source  
26 (no connection)  
27-  
Copper Leads  
Equal Length  
Figure 5-8 Wiring Connections for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Input – Input 2  
146  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
0 to 2 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts, or 1 to 5 Volt Inputs – Input 2  
Refer to Figure 5-9 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table  
5-12.  
Table 5-12 Set Up Wiring Procedure for 0 to 2 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts, or 1 to 5  
Volts – Input 2  
Step  
Action  
Connect the copper leads from the calibrator to the Input #2 terminals as shown in  
Figure 5-8.  
1
Place voltage source at zero before switching on.  
2
3
Do not switch voltage source ON/OFF while connected to the instrument.  
25 (no connection)  
26 +  
27 -  
Voltage  
+
Source  
_
Copper Leads  
Equal Length  
Figure 5-9 Wiring Connections for 0 to 2 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts or 1 to 5 Volts  
Input – Input 2  
5.7 Input 2 Calibration Procedure  
Preliminary Steps  
• Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 30 minutes before you calibrate.  
• Please read Subsection 5.6 – before beginning the procedure.  
• Make sure you have LOCK set to NONE. See Subsection 3.4 - Tuning Set Up  
Group.  
Continued next page  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Procedure  
The calibration procedure for Input #2 is listed in Table 5-13. The numeric codes are also  
listed.  
Table 5-13 Input 2 Calibration Procedure (Numeric Code 20000)  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Enter Calibration  
Mode  
Upper Display = CAL ( - - - - )  
Lower Display = INPUT2 (20000)  
Setup  
until you see  
You will see:  
Function  
Upper Display = DIS ( 0 )  
Lower Display = CALIN2 (20001)  
You will see:  
or  
Upper Display = BEGN ( 1 )  
Lower Display = CALIN2 (20001)  
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
2
Function  
Upper Display = APLY ( 2 )  
Lower Display = IN2ZRO (20002)  
•
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal  
to the 0 % range value for your particular input sensor.  
•
Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.  
Calibrate 100 %  
You will see:  
3
Function  
Upper Display = APLY ( 2 )  
Lower Display = IN2SPN (20003)  
•
Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal  
to the 100 % range value for your particular input  
sensor.  
•
Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.  
Exit the  
Calibration Mode  
The controller stores the calibration constants.  
4
Function  
To store the calibration constants and exit the calibration  
mode.  
Lower  
Display  
148  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
5.8 Restore Input Factory Calibration  
Introduction  
The factory calibration constants for all the input actuation types that can be used with  
the controller are stored in its non-volatile memory. Thus, you can quickly restore the  
“Factory Calibration” for a given input actuation type by simply changing the actuation  
type to another type and then changing it back to the original type.  
Refer to Table 5-14 Restore Factory Calibration for procedure  
ATTENTION  
A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration done for the input and  
may change the High and Low Range Limits.  
Protect your field calibration from accidental overwrites by configuring the appropriate  
LOCKOUT selection after calibration.  
See Section 3 - Configuration for specific instructions to set the lockout.  
Table 5-14 Restore Factory Calibration  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Set LOCKOUT to  
NONE  
until you see:  
Upper Display = SET UP  
Lower Display = TUNING  
Setup  
Until you see:  
Function  
Upper Display = one of the following:  
NONE – all parameters are read/write  
CAL – all parameters are read/write except Calibration  
CONF – configuration parameters are Read Only; no writes  
permitted  
VIEW – Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are  
read/write. No other parameters can be viewed.  
ALL – Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are available  
for read only. No other parameters can be viewed.  
Lower Display = LOCK  
Until NONE is in the upper display  
or  
until you see:  
Upper Display = SET UP  
Lower Display = INPUT 1 or 2  
Enter INPUT 1  
Setup Group  
2
Setup  
until you see:  
Upper Display = the current selection  
Lower Display = INxTYP  
Function  
to change the current selection to another selection  
or  
until the lower display rolls through the rest of the functions and  
returns to:  
Scroll through  
Functions  
3
Function  
Upper Display = the new selection  
Lower Display = INxTYP  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Calibration  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Result  
until you change the input selection in the upper display back to the  
proper selection. You will see:  
or  
Upper Display = Original Input Selection that matches your  
type of sensor.  
Lower Display = INxTYP  
to return to Normal operating mode.  
Return to Normal  
Operation  
4
Lower  
Display  
The factory calibration will be restored. If the problem is not  
corrected, contact the Honeywell Technical Assistance Center at 1-  
800-423-9883 USA and Canada  
150  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Calibration  
6 Output Calibration  
6.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section describes the field calibration procedures for the following types of outputs:  
• Current Output  
• Auxiliary Output  
What's in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
151  
6.1 Overview  
6.2 Current Output Calibration  
6.3 Auxiliary Output Calibration  
6.4 Restore Output Factory Calibration  
152  
154  
156  
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD  
OUTPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND  
SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE THAN  
ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Calibration  
6.2 Current Output Calibration  
Introduction  
Calibrate the controller so that the output provides the proper amount of current over the  
desired range. The controller can provide an output current range of from 0 to 21  
milliamperes and is usually calibrated at 4 mA for 0 % of output and 20 mA for 100 % of  
output, or any other values between 0 mA and 21 mA. It is not necessary to re-calibrate  
the controller in order to change from 4 to 20 mA operation over to 0 to 20 mA operation,  
a simple configuration change is all that is required. See the CO RANGE configuration  
in Sub-section 3.8 for details.  
Equipment Needed  
You will need a standard shop type milliammeter, with whatever accuracy is required,  
capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.  
Calibrator Connections  
Refer to Figure 6-1 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 6-1.  
Table 6-1 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Current Output  
Step  
Action  
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you calibrate.  
Set LOCK in the Tuning Set Up group to NONE.  
1
2
3
Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from terminals  
21 (–) and 19 (+). See Figure 6-1.  
Connect a milliammeter across these terminals.  
4
Milliammeter  
_
+
+
_
19+  
20  
21-  
Figure 6-1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Output  
152  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Calibration  
Procedure  
The procedure for calibrating the Current Output is listed in Table 6-2. The numeric  
codes are also listed. Make sure LOCK in the Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE.  
(See Subsection 3.4 – Tuning Set Up Group.)  
Table 6-2 Current Output Calibration Procedure  
(Numeric Code 30000)  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Enter Calibration  
Mode  
Upper Display = CAL ( - - - - )  
Lower Display = CURENT (30000)  
Setup  
until you see  
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
2
Function  
Upper Display = A Value  
Lower Display = ZROVAL (30001)  
Until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter,  
use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your controller. Normally, this will be the setting that  
produces 4 mA.  
or  
Calibrate 100 %  
This stores the 0 % value and  
you will see:  
3
Function  
Upper Display = A Value  
Lower Display = SPNVAL (30002)  
Until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter,  
use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your controller. Normally, this will be the setting that  
produces 20 mA.  
or  
Exit the  
Calibration Mode  
The controller stores the span value.  
To exit the calibration mode.  
4
Function  
Lower  
Display  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Calibration  
6.3 Auxiliary Output Calibration  
Introduction  
Calibrate the controller so that the auxiliary output provides the proper amount of current  
over the desired range. The controller can provide an auxiliary current output range of  
from 0 mA to 21 mA and is usually calibrated at 4 mA for 0 % of output and 20 mA for  
100 % of output or any other values between 0 mA and 21 mA. It is not necessary to re-  
calibrate the controller in order to change from 4 to 20 mA operation over to 0 to 20 mA  
operation, a simple configuration change is all that is required. See the AO RANGE  
configuration in Sub-section 3.12 for details.  
Equipment Needed  
You will need a calibrating device with whatever accuracy is required, capable of  
measuring 0 to 20 mA.  
Calibrator Connections  
Refer to Figure 6-2 and wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 6-3.  
Table 6-3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output  
Step  
Action  
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you calibrate.  
1
2
3
Set LOCK in the Tuning Set Up group to NONE.  
Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from terminals 12 (+)  
and 13 (–). See Figure 6-2.  
Connect a milliammeter across these terminals.  
4
Milliammeter  
_
+
+
_
12  
13  
Figure 6-2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output  
154  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Calibration  
Procedure  
The procedure for calibrating the auxiliary output is listed in Table 6-4. The numeric  
codes are also listed.  
Make sure “LOCK” in the Tuning Set Up group is set to “NONE” (see Subsection 3.4).  
Table 6-4 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure  
(Numeric Code 50000)  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Enter Calibration  
Mode  
Upper Display = CAL ( - - - - )  
Lower Display = AUXOUT (50000)  
Setup  
until you see  
Calibrate 0 %  
You will see:  
2
Function  
Upper Display = A Value  
Lower Display = ZROVAL (50001)  
until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter,  
use the values shown below depending on the action of  
your controller. Normally, this will be the setting that  
produces 4 mA.  
or  
Calibrate 100 %  
To store the 0 % value you will see:  
3
4
Function  
Upper Display = A Value  
Lower Display = SPNVAL (50002)  
until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter. .  
Normally, this will be the setting that produces 20 mA.  
or  
Exit the  
Calibration Mode  
The controller stores the span value.  
To exit the calibration mode.  
Function  
Lower  
Display  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Calibration  
6.4 Restore Output Factory Calibration Procedure  
Introduction  
The factory calibration constants for the Current and Auxiliary Outputs are stored in its  
non-volatile memory. Thus, you can quickly restore the “Factory Calibration” for those  
outputs by simply changing the CO RANGE or AO RANGE to the other setting and then  
changing it back to the original type.  
Refer to Table 6-5 Restore Factory Calibration for procedure  
ATTENTION  
A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration done for the output.  
Protect your field calibration from accidental overwrites by configuring the appropriate  
LOCKOUT selection after calibration.  
See Section 3 - Configuration for specific instructions to set the lockout.  
Table 6-5 Restore Factory Calibration Procedure  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Set LOCKOUT to  
NONE  
until you see:  
Upper Display = SET  
Lower Display = TUNING  
Setup  
Until you see:  
Function  
Upper Display = one of the following:  
NONE – all parameters are read/write  
CAL – all parameters are read/write except Calibration  
CONF – configuration parameters are Read Only; no writes  
permitted  
VIEW – Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are  
read/write. No other parameters can be viewed.  
ALL – Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are available  
for read only. No other parameters can be viewed.  
Lower Display = LOCK  
Until NONE is in the upper display  
or  
until you see:  
Upper Display = SET  
Lower Display = OUTALG (for the Current Output)  
- or -  
Enter OUTPUT  
or OPTIONS  
Setup Group  
2
Setup  
Lower Display = OPTION (for the Auxiliary Output)  
until you see:  
Function  
Upper Display = the current selection  
Lower Display = CRANGE (for the Current Output)  
- or -  
Lower Display = ARANGE (for the Auxiliary Output)  
to change the range configuration to the other selection  
or  
until the lower display rolls through the rest of the functions and  
returns to:  
Scroll through  
Functions  
3
Function  
156  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Calibration  
Step  
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Upper Display = the new selection  
Lower Display = CRANGE (for the Current Output)  
- or -  
Lower Display = ARANGE (for the Auxiliary Output)  
to change the range selection in the upper display back to the  
proper selection. You will see:  
or  
Upper Display = Original range selection  
Lower Display = CRANGE (for the Current Output)  
- or -  
Lower Display = ARANGE (for the Auxiliary Output)  
to return to Normal operating mode.  
Return to Normal  
Operation  
4
Lower  
Display  
The factory calibration will be restored. If the problem is not  
corrected, contact the Honeywell Technical Assistance Center at 1-  
800-423-9883 USA and Canada  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting/Service  
7 Troubleshooting/Service  
7.1 Overview  
Introduction  
Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application  
problems as well as by hardware problems. We recommend that you investigate the  
problems in the following order:  
• installation related problems  
• application related problems  
• hardware and software related problems  
and use the information presented in this section to solve them.  
What's in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
158  
7.1  
7.2  
Overview  
Troubleshooting Aids  
159  
• Overall Error Messages  
• Controller Failure Symptoms  
• Customer Support  
• Determining the Software Version Number  
7.3  
7.4  
7.5  
7.6  
7.7  
Power-up Tests  
161  
161  
162  
164  
165  
Status Tests  
Background Tests  
Controller Failure Symptoms  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
• Power Failure  
• Current Proportional Output Failure  
• Time Proportional Output Failure  
• Time/Current - Current/Time Proportional Output Failure  
• Alarm Relay Output Failure  
• Keyboard Failure  
7.8  
7.9  
Restore Factory Configuration  
Software Upgrades  
174  
175  
158  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Installation related problems  
Read the Installation section in this manual to make sure the UDC2500 has been properly  
installed. The installation section provides information on protection against electrical  
noise, connecting external equipment to the controller, and shielding and routing external  
wiring.  
ATTENTION System noise induced into the controller will result in diagnostic error  
messages recurring. If the diagnostic error messages can be cleared, it indicates a “soft”  
failure and is probably noise related.  
If system noise is suspected, completely isolate the controller from all field wiring.  
Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all controller functions; i.e. Gain, Rate,  
Reset, Output, Alarms, etc.  
Application related problems  
Review the application of the controller; then, if necessary, direct your questions to the  
local sales office.  
Hardware and software related problems  
Use the troubleshooting error message prompts and controller failure symptoms to  
identify typical failures which may occur in the controller. Follow the troubleshooting  
procedures to correct them.  
7.2 Troubleshooting Aids  
Overall error messages  
An error message can occur:  
• At power-up. See Subsection 7.3.  
• When the Status Tests are requested. See Subsection 7.4.  
• During continuous background tests while in normal operation. See Subsection 7.5.  
Controller failure symptoms  
Other failures may occur that deal with the Power, Output, or Alarms. Refer to the  
controller failure symptom in Table 7-4 to determine what is wrong and the  
troubleshooting procedures to use to correct the problem.  
Check installation  
If a set of symptoms still persists, refer to Section 2 - Installation and ensure proper  
installation and proper use of the controller in the system.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Customer support  
If you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting procedures listed in this  
section, you can get technical assistance by dialing 1-800-423-9883 USA and Canada.  
An engineer will discuss your problem with you. Please have your complete model  
number, serial number, and Software version available. The model and serial  
numbers can be found on the chassis nameplate. The software version can be viewed  
under Setup Group “Status.” See Table 7-1.  
If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement controller or part will be  
shipped with instructions for returning the defective unit.  
Do not return your controller without authorization from Honeywell’s Technical  
Assistance Center or until the replacement has been received.  
Check out Honeywell’s web site at http://www.honeywell.com/ps.  
Determining the software version  
Table 7-1 lists the procedure for identifying the software version number.  
Table 7-1 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select  
STATUS  
Set Up Group  
Upper Display = READ  
Lower Display = STATUS  
Setup  
Read the software  
version  
2
You will see:  
Function  
Upper Display = Software version number  
32xx  
Lower Display = VERSION  
Please give this number to the Customer Support person. It  
will indicate which version of UDC2500 you have and help  
them determine a solution to your problem.  
160  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
7.3 Power-up Tests  
What happens at power-up  
When power is applied, the controller will run three diagnostic tests. After these tests are  
completed, “TEST DONE” is displayed.  
Test Failures  
If one or more of these tests fail, the controller will go to the Failsafe Manual Mode, and  
FAILSF will flash in the lower display and a message indicating which test failed will  
appear in the lower display. Then, “DONE” will appear in the lower display.  
Three Position Step test failures  
For controller configured for Three Position Step Control with motor position indication  
and Auto-cal has never been done, the prompt CAL MTR will appear to suggest that the  
controller be calibrated.  
7.4 Status Tests  
Introduction  
When required, the results of these tests can be checked to determine the reason the  
controller has gone to Failsafe.  
How to check the status tests  
The procedure in Table 7-2 tells you how to display the results of the status tests.  
Table 7-2 Procedure for Displaying the Status Test (Numeric Code 1200)  
Results  
Step  
1
Operation  
Press  
Result  
Select  
STATUS  
Set Up Group  
Upper Display = READ  
Lower Display = STATUS  
Setup  
Read the test  
results  
2
You will see:  
Function  
Function  
Upper Display = NO or YES YES indicates a failure  
Lower Display = FAILSAFE  
Upper Display = PASS or FAIL  
Lower Display = TEST  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
7.5 Background Tests  
Introduction  
The UDC2500 performs ongoing background tests to verify data and memory integrity.  
If there is a malfunction, a diagnostic message will be displayed (blinking) in the lower  
display.  
In the case of simultaneous malfunctions, the messages will appear in sequence in the  
lower display. Table 7-3 lists these background tests, the reason for their failure, and  
how to correct the problem.  
Diagnostic messages may be suppressed (stop the blinking) by pressing the RUN/HOLD  
key. The messages will still be available for viewing by pressing the LOWER  
DISPLAY key.  
Table 7-3 Background Tests  
Lower  
Reason for Failure  
How to Correct the Problem  
Display  
Unable to write to non-volatile  
memory. Anytime you change a  
parameter and it is not accepted, you  
will see E FAIL.  
1. Check the accuracy of the parameter and re-  
enter.  
E FAIL  
2. Try to change something in configuration.  
3. Run through Read STATUS tests to re-write  
to EEPROM.  
This error message shows whenever  
the controller goes into a failsafe  
mode of operation. This will happen if:  
• RAM test failed  
1. Run through STATUS check to determine the  
reason for the failure.  
FAILSF  
2. Press the SET UP key until STATUS appears  
in the lower display.  
• Configuration test failed  
• Calibration test failed  
• Burnout configured for none  
and the input failed.  
3. Press the FUNCTION key to see whether the  
tests pass or fail, then run through the  
STATUS codes a second time to see if the  
error cleared.  
Input 1 out of range. The process  
input is outside the range limits.  
1. Make sure the range and actuation are  
configured properly.  
IN1RNG  
2. Check the input source.  
3. Restore the factory calibration. (See  
Subsection 0.)  
4. Field calibrate. See Section 5 - Input  
Calibration.  
Two consecutive failures of input 1  
integration; i.e., cannot make analog  
to digital conversion. This will happen  
if:  
1. Make sure the actuation is configured  
IN1_FL  
correctly. See Section 3 - Configuration.  
2. Make sure the input is correct and that it has  
not burned-out (opened).  
• Upscale or Downscale  
burnout is selected and the  
input is open  
• Input not configured correctly  
for the sensor being used  
3. Check for gross over-ranging with a  
multimeter.  
4. Restore factory calibration. See Subsection  
5.8  
162  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Lower  
Reason for Failure  
How to Correct the Problem  
Display  
Input 2 out of range. The remote input Same as IN1RNG above.  
is outside the range limits.  
IN2RNG  
Two consecutive failures of input 2  
integration. i.e., cannot make analog  
to digital conversion.  
Same as IN1FL above.  
IN2_FL  
• PV low limit is > PV high limit  
• SP low limit is > SP high limit  
• Output low limit > Output high limit  
1. Check the configuration for each item and  
reconfigure if necessary.  
CNFERR  
PV out of range.  
PV = INP1 x RATIO1+ INP1 BIAS  
1. Make sure the input signal is correct.  
PV LIM  
RV LIM  
2. Make sure the Ratio and Bias settings are  
correct.  
3. Recheck the calibration. Use Bias of 0.0  
The result of the formula shown below 1. Make sure the input signal is correct.  
is beyond the range of the remote  
2. Make sure the Ratio2 and Bias2 settings are  
variable.  
correct.  
RV = INP2 X RATIO + BIAS  
3. Recheck the calibration. Use a Ratio2 of 1.0  
and a Bias2 of 0.0.  
Setpoint Program start segment  
number is less than ending segment  
number.  
Check SP Program configuration, subsection 3.5  
Set up Group SPPROG function prompts  
“STRSEG” and “ENDSEG”.  
SEGERR  
TCWARN  
The Thermocouple is starting to  
burnout.  
This diagnostic message means that the  
controller has detected that the thermocouple is  
starting to burnout. This error message may also  
be created if the resistance of the wires used to  
connect the thermocouple to the instrument is  
above 100 ohms.  
The Thermocouple is in imminent  
danger of burning out.  
This diagnostic message means that the  
controller has detected that the thermocouple  
will soon fail. User should consider replacing the  
thermocouple as soon as possible. This  
message will also be generated if the resistance  
of the wires used to connect the thermocouple to  
the instrument is above 180 ohms.  
TCFAIL  
Current Output is less than 3.5 mA.  
Auxiliary Output is less than 3.5 mA.  
The current output is open circuit. Check the  
field wiring. See Procedure #2.  
OUT1FL  
OUT2FL  
The auxiliary output is open circuit. Check the  
field wiring. See Procedure #10.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting/Service  
7.6 Controller Failure Symptoms  
Introduction  
In addition to the error message prompts, there are failure symptoms that can be  
identified by noting how the controller displays and indicators are reacting.  
Symptoms  
Compare your symptoms with those shown in Table 7-4.  
Table 7-4 Controller Failure Symptoms  
Upper  
Display  
Lower  
Display  
Indicators  
Controller  
Output  
Probable  
Cause  
Trouble-  
shooting  
Procedure  
Upper  
Display  
Lower  
Display  
Indicators  
Controller  
Output  
Probable  
Cause  
Trouble-  
shooting  
Procedure  
Blank  
OK  
Blank  
Off  
OK  
None  
Power Failure  
1
2
Current  
Proportional Output  
Displayed  
Output  
disagrees  
with Controller  
Output  
Controller  
Output  
disagrees  
with Displayed  
Output  
OK  
OK  
Three Position  
Step Control  
Output  
3
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Time Proportional  
Output  
4
5
6
Current/Time  
Proportional Output  
OK  
External Alarm  
function does  
not operate  
properly  
Malfunction in  
alarm output  
Display does not change when a key is pressed  
Keyboard  
Malfunction  
7
8
9
Controller fails to go into “Slave” operation during communications  
Communications  
Failure  
Controller  
Auxiliary Output  
disagrees  
with Displayed  
Auxiliary Output  
OK  
Displayed  
Output  
OK  
Auxiliary Output  
disagrees with  
Auxiliary Output  
Other symptoms  
If a set of symptoms or prompts other than the one you started with appears while  
troubleshooting, re-evaluate the symptoms. This may lead to a different troubleshooting  
procedure.  
164  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
If the symptom still persists, refer to the installation section in this manual to ensure  
proper installation and proper use of the controller in your system.  
7.7 Troubleshooting Procedures  
Introduction  
The troubleshooting procedures are listed in numerical order as they appear in Table 7-4.  
Each procedure lists what to do if you have that particular failure and how to do it or  
where to find the data needed to accomplish the task.  
WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD  
TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE  
CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE  
PERSONNEL. MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-  
ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.  
Equipment needed  
You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in  
the tables that follow:  
• Multimeter – Capable of measuring millivolts, milliamps and resistance.  
• Calibration sources – T/C, mV, Volt, etc.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #1  
Table 7-5 explains how to troubleshoot power failure symptoms.  
Table 7-5 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the AC line voltage.  
Use a voltmeter to measure the AC voltage  
across terminals L1 and L2 on the rear  
terminal panel of the controller.  
Check the earth ground connection.  
Make sure the chassis plugs  
into the rear of the case  
properly.  
Withdraw the chassis and visually inspect the  
controller board and the inside of the case.  
2
3
Check the system for Brown-  
outs, heavy load switching, etc.,  
and conformance to installation  
instructions.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation.  
Change Power board.  
Installation instructions supplied with new  
board.  
4
Procedure #2  
Table 7-6 explains how to troubleshoot Current Output failure symptoms.  
Table 7-6 Troubleshooting Current Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is  
configured for Current output  
and the proper range (4 to 20 or  
0 to 20) is configured.  
Make Output Set Up group function prompt  
OUT ALG = CUR.  
Make the Output Set UP group function  
prompt CRANGE = 4–20 or 0–20 per your  
application.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
Check the field wiring.  
Check the output.  
Output impedance must be less than or equal  
to 1000 ohms.  
2
3
Put the controller into Manual mode and  
change the output from 0 % to 100 % (4-20  
mA). Use a DC milliammeter at the rear  
terminals to verify the output.  
Recalibrate the Current  
Proportional output.  
Refer to Section 6 - Output Calibration for  
details.  
4
5
6
Change Current Output board.  
Installation instructions provided with new  
board.  
Change Controller  
166  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #3  
Table 7-7 explains how to troubleshoot Position Proportional Output failure symptoms.  
Table 7-7 Troubleshooting Three Position Step Control Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make certain that the controller Make Output Algorithm Set Up group function  
is configured for Three Position prompt OUT ALG = TPSC.  
Step control.  
Refer to Section 3.8.  
2
3
Check the field wiring.  
Check the output.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for details.  
Put the controller into Manual mode and  
change the output from 0 % to 100 %.  
4
Check whether the motor  
drives in both directions.  
Remove controller and short out Output 1 or  
Output 2. The motor should go to either open  
or closed. If it does controller is ok. If not,  
repeat Step 1.  
5
Check whether the motor  
drives in either direction. If the  
motor does not drive in either  
direction, check the motor. If  
the motor drives in one  
direction but not the other, go  
to Step 6  
Refer to the motor instructions.  
6
Make sure the output relays  
are actuating properly.  
Put the controller into Manual mode. Vary the  
output above and below the present value.  
Observe “OT” in the Lower Display and the  
Relay Annunciators on the operator interface.  
If they are not working properly, check the field  
wiring, then go to Step 5.  
If they are, go to Step 7.  
7
Change the two Output Relays Installation instructions supplied with the new  
or the Dual Relay Board  
(depending upon unit)  
relays or board.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #4  
Table 7-8 explains how to troubleshoot Time Proportional Output failure.  
Table 7-8 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is configured Make Output Algorithm Set Up group function  
for Time Proportional output.  
Check the field wiring.  
Check the output.  
prompt OUTALG = RLY or RLYD.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
Make sure the NO or NC contact wiring is correct.  
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for details.  
2
3
Put the controller into Manual mode. Vary the  
output above and below the present value.  
Observe OUT1 indicator on the operator interface.  
Contact should change state. 0 % open, 100 %  
closed. Listen for a click from the relay when the  
OUT1 indicator changes state.  
Check relay.  
Change relay.  
4
5
Change MCU board.  
Installation instructions supplied with the new  
board.  
168  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #5  
Table 7-9 explains how to troubleshoot Current/Time or Time/Current Proportional  
Output failure.  
Table 7-9 Troubleshooting Current/Time or Time/Current Proportional  
Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is configured Make Output Algorithm Set Up group function  
for Time/Current or Current/Time  
Proportional output.  
prompt OUT ALG = TCUR or CURT.  
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration.  
Check the field wiring.  
Make sure the NO or NC contact wiring selection  
is correct.  
2
3
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for details.  
Check the relay output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode. Vary the  
output above and below the present value.  
Observe OUT1 indicator on the operator interface.  
Listen for a click from the relay when the OUT1  
indicator changes state.  
Check the Current Proportional  
Output.  
Put the controller into Manual mode and change  
the output from 0 % to 100 % (4-20 mA). Use a DC  
milliammeter at the rear terminals to verify the  
output.  
4
Recalibrate the controller.  
Refer to Section 6 - Output Calibration for details.  
5
6
Change relay and/or Current Output  
boards.  
Installation instructions supplied with new board.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #6  
Table 7-10 explains how to troubleshoot Alarm Relay Output failure.  
Table 7-10 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the alarm configuration  
data. If it is correct, check the  
field wiring.  
Reconfigure if necessary.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration for  
details.  
Check that the applicable alarm If the alarm type is set for PV, place the  
relay actuates properly controller in manual mode. Vary the input  
depending on what you have set to raise and lower the PV around the  
2
at prompt AxSxTYPE.  
setpoint. Listen for a click from the relay  
as the PV moves in either direction and  
note that the proper ALM1 or ALM2 is lit.  
If it does, check the field wiring.  
EXAMPLE: If the alarm is set for MAN,  
put the controller into manual mode. The  
alarm light is ON. Put the controller into  
automatic mode and the alarm light is  
OFF.  
Check the contacts.  
Make sure the NO or NC contact wiring is  
correct.  
3
Refer to Section 2 - Installation for relay  
contact information.  
Change the relay and/or the  
current output board.  
Installation instructions supplied with the  
new relay or board.  
4
5
Change MCU board.  
Installation instructions supplied with the  
new board.  
170  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #7  
Table 7-11 explains how to troubleshoot a Keyboard failure.  
Table 7-11 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the keyboard is  
connected properly to the  
MCU/output and power/input  
boards.  
Withdraw the chassis from the case  
and visually inspect the connection.  
Controller Keyboard or specific keys Use your four-digit security code  
2
3
may be LOCKED OUT via the  
security code.  
number to change the lockout level.  
Refer to Section 3 – Configuration.  
Run the keyboard test.  
Press the [SET UP] key and hold in,  
then press the [FUNCTION] key at the  
same time. The controller will run a  
display test. Then you will see:  
Upper Display  
KEYS  
Lower Display  
TRY ALL  
Press each key. If it works, the key  
name will appear in the lower display.  
Replace the display/keyboard if any Refer to “Parts Replacement  
keys do not function. Procedures” in this section.  
4
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #8  
Table 7-11 explains how to troubleshoot a Communications failure  
Table 7-12 Troubleshooting a RS-485 Communications Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the Address Number,  
See Section 3.13.  
ComState and Baud Rate settings.  
Check the field wiring and  
termination resistor.  
Using an ohm meter, check the resistance across  
the communications rear terminals. See Section  
2.7 for wiring diagrams.  
2
3
Make sure the Communications  
Printed Wiring Board is installed  
properly in the controller.  
Withdraw the chassis from the case and inspect the  
board. See the exploded view (Figure 8-1) for  
location of the board. Return the chassis to the  
case.  
Determine if the Communications  
Disconnect the communications cable from the rear  
4
board is faulty by running a LOCAL terminals. Run the Local Loopback Test.  
LOOPBACK TEST.  
Press [SET UP] until you see:  
If the test fails, replace the board.  
If the test passes, the problem is  
most likely elsewhere in the  
communications network.  
Upper Display  
SET UP  
Lower Display  
COM  
Press [FUNCTION] until you see:  
Upper Display  
DISABLE  
Lower Display  
LOOPBACK  
Press  
or  
you will see:  
Upper Display  
ENABLE  
Lower Display  
LOOPBACK  
The test will run until the operator disables it here.  
172  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Procedure #9  
Table 7-13 explains how to troubleshoot a Communications failure  
Table 7-13 Troubleshooting an Ethernet Communications Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Check the IP address, Subnet  
Mask address and Gateway  
address settings.  
See the PIE Tool Manual.  
Check if the Ethernet Connection  
is active.  
Looking into the instrument, there should be steady  
green LED. If this is not present, then the  
instrument is not seeing a valid Ethernet  
connection. See Section 2.7 for wiring diagrams. A  
second green LED will blink during actual Ethernet  
transactions.  
2
Change Ethernet  
Communications board.  
Installation instructions provided with new  
board.  
3
Change Controller  
4
Procedure #10  
Table 7-14 explains how to troubleshoot Auxiliary Proportional Output failure  
symptoms.  
Table 7-14 Troubleshooting Auxiliary Output Failure  
Step  
1
What to do  
How to do it  
Make sure the controller is  
configured for Auxiliary Output  
Make Options Set Up group function prompt  
AUX OUT any selection other than NONE. If  
and the proper range (4 to 20 or this prompt does not show up, check if DIG IN  
0 to 20) is configured.  
2 is enabled. If so, then as Auxiliary Ouptut  
and Digital Input 2 are mutually exclusive, you  
must chose which one of these features you  
wish to use.  
Make the Options Set UP group function  
prompt CRANGE = 4–20 or 0–20 per your  
application.  
Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.  
Check the field wiring.  
Check the output.  
Output impedance must be less than or equal  
to 1000 ohms.  
2
3
Change the AUX OUT selection to OUTPUT.  
Put the controller into Manual mode and  
change the output from 0 % to 100 % (4-20  
mA). Use a DC milliammeter at the rear  
terminals to verify the output.  
Recalibrate the Auxiliary output. Refer to Section 6 - Output Calibration for  
4
5
6
details.  
Change Auxiliary Output board. Installation instructions provided with new  
board.  
Change Controller  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
7.8 Restoring Factory Configuration  
Introduction  
This procedure restores the configuration of the instrument back to the Factory Settings  
per Section 3.17.  
ATTENTION: Restoring the factory configuration overwrites all user-entered  
configuration changes. This procedure cannot be undone, it is a one-way process.  
Table 7-15 explains how to restore Factory Configuration.  
Table 7-15 Restoring Factory Configuration  
Step  
What to do  
Turn off the power to the instrument for at least five seconds.  
1
2
Turn the power back on and simultaneously press the “FUNCTION” and  
keys. This must be done while “TEST DONE” is being displayed.  
If step 2 was performed correctly, the instrument will now display “UDC”  
[Upper] “UPDATE” [Lower].  
3
4
5
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “DIS” [Upper]  
“RESTORE” [Lower].  
Press the  
key. The instrument will now display “CFG” [Upper]  
“RESTORE” [Lower].  
6
7
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “DOIN”  
“RESTORE”  
When the instrument finishes the restore operation, it automatically resets  
itself and restarts in the product mode. The instrument configuration will  
now be the same as it was when the instrument left the factory and all user-  
entered configurations since that time have been overwritten.  
174  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
7.9 Software Upgrades  
Introduction  
This procedure enables software features that were not ordered from the factory. See  
Table 8-3 for a list of the available Software Upgrades.  
ATTENTION:  
This procedure cannot be undone, it is a one-way process.  
Each instrument has a unique code number sequence, so the following procedure  
must be performed on each instrument to be upgraded.  
Table 7-16 explains how to enable new software features.  
Table 7-16 Software Upgrades  
Step  
What to do  
Turn off the power to the instrument for at least five seconds.  
1
2
Turn the power back on and simultaneously press the FUNCTION and  
keys. This must be done while “TEST DONE” is being displayed.  
If step 2 was performed correctly, the instrument will now display “UDC”  
[Upper] “UPDATE” [Lower].  
3
4
5
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “DIS” [Upper]  
“RESTORE” [Lower].  
Press the  
key. The instrument will now display “CFG” [Upper]  
“RESTORE” [Lower].  
6
7
Press the  
“RESTORE” [Lower].  
key. The instrument will now display “OPTN” [Upper]  
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “XXXX” [Upper]  
“ENTER1” [Lower], where XXXX is a unique code number for this particular  
instrument. Write this number down.  
8
9
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “XXXX”  
“ENTER2”. Write this number down.  
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “XXXX”  
“ENTER3”. Write this number down.  
Write down the Model and Serial Numbers of your instrument.  
10  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting/Service  
Contact your Honeywell Representative to place an order. Please have a  
11  
company purchase order number available before you call. The order entry  
person will ask for the following information:  
1. Software Upgrade Part Number you require:  
Dual Display with Auto/Manual – 50004634-501, or  
Set Point Programming (includes Dual Display and Auto/Manual) –  
50004634-502  
2. Model Number of your instrument(s)  
3. Serial Number of your instrument(s)  
4. Code Numbers 1, 2 and 3 from your instrument(s)  
5. Purchase order number.  
With this information, a new code number set will be generated for your  
instrument.  
When you have the new code number set, repeat steps 1 to 6.  
12  
13  
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “XXXX”  
“ENTER1”, where XXXX is a unique code number for this particular  
instrument. Using the  
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “XXXX”  
“ENTER2”. Using the and keys, enter the new Code 2 number.  
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will now display “XXXX”  
“ENTER3”. Using the and keys, enter the new Code 3 number.  
and  
keys, enter the new Code 1 number.  
14  
15  
16  
Press the FUNCTION Key. The instrument will process the new code  
numbers and add the new software feature. If the code numbers were  
entered incorrectly, the controller will go into Manual Mode and flash the  
message “FAILSAFE” on the lower display. Repeat steps 12 through 16.  
When the instrument finishes the operation, it automatically resets itself and  
restarts in the product mode. The instrument configuration now includes  
the added software feature(s).  
17  
176  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts List  
8 Parts List  
8.1 Exploded View  
Introduction  
Figure 8-1 is an exploded view of the UDC2500 Controller. Each part is labeled with a  
key number. The part numbers are listed by key number in Table 8-1. Parts not shown  
are listed in Table 8-2.  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 8-1 UDC2500 Exploded View  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parts List  
Table 8-1 Parts Identification  
Key  
Part Number  
Description  
Number  
1
2
3
51453143-501  
51452758-502  
51452822-502  
51452822-503  
51452810-501  
51452816-501  
51452801-503  
51452801-504  
Bezel Assembly and Bezel Gasket  
Display/Keyboard (with IR)  
Power/Output PWA (90-264 Vac Operation)  
Power/Output PWA (24 Vac/dc Operation)  
Auxiliary Output/Digital Input/RS-422/485 Communications PWA  
Auxiliary Output/Digital Input/Ethernet Communications PWA  
MCU/Inputs PWA (with 2nd Input and IR) for Controllers  
MCU/Inputs PWA (with IR) for Limit Controllers  
Output 1/2  
4
5
6
• Electro-Mechanical Relay  
• Open Collector Output PWA  
• Solid State Relay  
• Current Output PWA  
• Dual Electromechanical Relay PWA  
30755306-501  
30756679-501  
30756725-501  
51452804-501  
51452807-501  
7
8
51452759-501  
Case Assembly (including Mounting Kit with 4 brackets & screws)  
Output 3  
• Electro-Mechanical Relay  
• Open Collector Output PWA  
• Solid State Relay  
30755306-501  
30756679-501  
30756725-501  
Table 8-2 Parts Not Shown  
Part Number  
Description  
4-20 mA Input Resistor Assembly (250 ohm)  
0-10 Volt Input Resistor Assembly (100K pair)  
Mounting Kits (12 brackets & screws)  
30731996-506  
30754465-501  
51452763-501  
Table 8-3 Software Upgrades (see Section 7.9)  
Part Number  
Description  
Dual Display and Manual/Auto  
50004634-501  
50004634-502  
Dual Display, Manual/Auto and Set Point Programming (SPP)  
178  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parts List  
8.2 Removing the chassis  
Insert thin screwdriver under  
tabs and twist slightly and  
gently to disengage front  
Using a thin screwdriver, gently twist the screwdriver to pry the side tabs from the front  
face. Pry just enough to release it, otherwise you’ll bend or break the tab. If you break or  
bend the tab and can’t reattach the front snugly, you’ll need to reattach the front using the  
4 NEMA4 screws provided. See Table 2-4 page 16.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
9 Modbus RTU Function Codes  
9.1 Overview  
This section describes the function codes needed to upload and download the  
configuration from a host computer into this instrument.  
What's in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
180  
9.1 Overview  
9.2 General Information  
9.3 Function Code 20  
9.4 Function Code 21  
180  
182  
186  
9.2 General Information  
This instrument uses a subset of the standard Modbus RTU function codes to provide  
access to process-related information. Several MODICON function codes are  
implemented. It is appropriate to define instrument-specific "user-defined" function  
codes. Where differences occur between the two protocols it will be noted. Several  
standard Modbus RTU function codes are supported.  
Configuration ID Tags  
Function codes 20 and 21 use the RS422/485 tag IDs for accessing configuration and  
process-related data. These tags are fully explained in Section 10.  
The tag IDs represent the register addresses used in the Request Message.  
Other Modbus Codes  
For Modbus codes other than for accessing configuration and process-related data for  
this controller, refer to the Modbus RTU Serial Communications User Manual # 51-55-  
25-66.  
180  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
Register Address Structure  
Table 9-1 Integer Parameter Type  
Register  
Numbers  
(Dec)  
Name  
Access  
Notes  
1
2
Type = 1  
Attribute  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
16-bit Unsigned Integer  
1 = Read Only,  
2 = Read/Write  
3
Value (16 bit integer)  
Not Used  
Read / Write  
4
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
5
Low Range (16 bit integer)  
Not Used  
6
7
8
High Range (16 bit Integer)  
Not Used  
9 to 13  
Description Text (ASCII string)  
Table 9-2 Floating Point Parameter Type  
Register  
Numbers  
(Dec)  
Name  
Access  
Notes  
1
2
Type = 2  
Attribute  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
IEEE Floating Point  
1 = Read Only,  
2 = Read/Write  
3
Value (float high word)  
Read / Write  
4
5
6
7
8
Value (float low word)  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
NOT SUPPORTED  
Low Range (float high word)  
Low Range (float low word)  
High Range (float high word)  
High Range (float low word)  
Description Text (ASCII string)  
9 to 13  
Register Count  
The register count depends on the data format of the registers being read or written.  
Integer data is represented in sixteen bits and is transferred high byte first.  
Floating point data is transferred in IEEE 32-bit format.  
The register count definitions are:  
0001 = Integer Data  
0002 = Floating Point Data  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
9.3 Function Code 20 (14h) - Read Configuration Reference Data  
Description  
Function code 20 (14 Hex) is used in this instrument to read information stored in its  
configuration database. Each configuration item is explicitly addressed by a file number  
and register address. IEEE 32-bit floating point and 16-bit integer formats are supported.  
Request and Response Formats  
The Request and Response formats for Function code 20 (14 Hex) are shown below.  
Details for each block reference follow.  
Request Message Format  
Slave  
Address  
Function  
Code 14  
Byte  
Count  
Reference  
Type  
File  
Number  
Register  
Count  
Register  
Address  
Reference  
Type
File  
Number  
Register  
Count  
CRC  
Data  
CRC  
Data  
Register  
Address  
Response Message Format  
Data  
Byte  
Count  
Slave  
Address  
Function  
Code 14  
Byte  
Count  
Reference  
Type  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Byte  
Count  
Data  
Reference  
Type  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
CRC  
Data  
CRC  
Data  
Byte Count  
The Byte Count equals the number of bytes transmitted in either the request or response  
message and will be the minimum number required to transmit all requested data.  
Data Byte Count  
The Data Byte Count is the number of data bytes of the sub response including the  
Reference Type but not including itself. A floating point sub response has four bytes of  
data and one byte representing the reference type making the data byte count equal to  
five.  
182  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
Reference Type Definitions  
The Reference Type definition is always 06.  
See examples in Subsection 9.3.1  
File Number  
The file number word contains the register number from the register address structure  
tables on page 3. Although the register address structure tables indicate up to 13 data  
registers are available for access, only register address 3 is currently supported.  
Register Address  
The register address word represents the tag ID number for the parameter(s) being  
accessed. The register address word is made up of two bytes—the MSB = 00 always. The  
LSB contains the tag ID number. The tag ID numbers represent the parameter’s register  
address(es). See Section 3 for the tag ID numbers.  
Table 9-3 Register Address Format for Function Code 20  
Register  
Address(es)  
(Decimal)  
Register  
Address(es)  
(Hex)  
Format  
001 to 125  
0001 to 007D  
0080 to 00FF  
analog formatted data  
(2 registers – IEEE 32-bit floating point)  
128 to 255  
integer formatted data  
(1 register – 16-bit integer)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
9.3.1 Read Configuration Examples  
Example #1  
The following is an example of a request to read the Gain 1 value using Function code  
20.  
Request Message (Read (Gain 1) = ID Tag 001)  
02 14 07 06 00 03 00 01 00 02 (CRC16)  
Where:  
02  
= Address  
14  
07  
= Function Code 20 (14 hex)  
= Byte Count  
06  
= Reference Type  
00,03  
00,01  
00 02  
(CRC16)  
= File Number (Access Data Value)  
= Register Address (Standard Access Gain 1 - Tag ID #1)  
= Register Count (Floating Point Data)  
This is the response to the above request.  
Response Message  
02 14 06 05 06 3F C0 00 00 (CRC16)  
Where:  
02  
14  
06  
05  
06  
= Address  
= Function Code 20 (14 Hex)  
= Byte Count  
= Sub Message Length  
= Reference Type (IEEE Floating Point)  
3F C0 00 00 = 1.50 (Value of Proportional Band)  
(CRC16)  
184  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
Example #2  
The following is another example of a request and response message using Function code  
20.  
Request Message (Read LSP #1 = ID Tag 39 and LSP #2 = ID Tag 53)  
02 14 0E 06 00 03 00 27 00 02 06 00 03 00 35 00 02 (CRC16)  
Where:  
02  
= Address  
14  
= Function Code 20 (14 Hex)  
0E  
= Byte Count  
06  
= Reference Type (IEEE Floating Point)  
= File Number (Access Data Value)  
= Register Address (Standard Access LSP #1 - ID Tag 39)  
= Register Count to read (Floating Point Data)  
= Reference Type (IEEE Floating Point)  
= File Number (Access Data Value)  
= Register Address (Standard Access LSP #2 - ID Tag 53)  
= Register Count to read (Floating Point Data)  
00,03  
00,27  
00,02  
06  
00,03  
00,35  
00,02  
(CRC16)  
This is the response to the above request.  
Response Message  
02 14 0C 05 06 43 C8 00 00 05 06 44 60 00 00 (CRC16)  
Where:  
02  
14  
0C  
05  
06  
= Address  
= Function Code 20 (14 Hex)  
= Byte Count  
= Data Byte Count (Sub Message Length)  
= Reference Type (IEEE Floating Point)  
43 C8 00 00 = 400.0 (Value of Local Setpoint #1)  
05  
06  
= Data Byte Count (Sub Message Length)  
= Reference Type (IEEE Floating Point)  
44 60 00 00 = 896.0 (Value of Local Setpoint #2)  
(CRC16)  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
9.4 Function Code 21 (15h) - Write Configuration Reference Data  
Introduction  
Function Code 21 (15 Hex) is used in this instrument to allow writes of integer and  
floating point values to the configuration database and override values.  
The configuration database of this instrument is located in EEROM. The override values  
are stored in RAM.  
Integer format is used to write to “Digital” configuration items. Floating Point format is  
used to write to “Analog” configuration items as defined by the configuration ID tags.  
Write Restrictions  
Care should be taken not to exceed the 100,000 write limit of the EEROM.  
Request and Response Formats  
The Request and Response formats for Function code 21 (15 Hex) are shown below.  
Details for each block reference follow.  
Request Message Format  
Slave  
Address Code 15  
Function  
Byte  
Count  
Reference  
Type  
File  
Number  
Register  
Count  
Register  
Address  
CRC  
Data  
File  
Number  
CRC  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Response Message Format (echo back of request)  
Slave  
Address Code 15  
Function  
Byte  
Count  
Reference  
Type  
File  
Number  
Register  
Count  
Register  
Address  
CRC  
Data  
File  
Number  
CRC  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
Data  
The register address is interpreted as the tag ID configuration number.  
For Infrared Transactions, add three BOFs (C0hex) at the beginning of each message and  
one EOF (FFhex) at the end of each message.  
Reference Type Definitions  
The Reference Type definition is always 06.  
See examples in Subsection 9.4.1  
186  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
File Number  
The file number word contains the register number from the register address structure  
shown in Table 9-1 and Table 9-2. Although the register address structure tables indicate  
up to 13 data registers are available for access, only register address 3 is currently  
supported.  
Register Address  
The register address is used to designate the tag ID number for the parameter being  
accessed. The register address is made up of two bytes—the MSB = 00 always. The LSB  
contains the RS422 tag ID number. The tag ID numbers represent the parameter’s  
register address(es). See Section 10 for the tag ID numbers.  
Table 9-4 Register Address Format for Function Code 21  
Register  
Address(es)  
(Dec)  
Register  
Address(es)  
(Hex)  
Format  
001 to 125  
0001 to 007D analog formatted data  
(2 registers – IEEE 32-bit floating point)  
0080 to 00D7 integer formatted data  
& 00FF (2 registers – IEEE 32-bit floating point)  
128 to 215  
& 255  
Unrestricted Registers  
As mentioned previously, all register data is stored in the EEROM of this instrument with  
some exceptions. These exceptions were made to allow write access to override  
information. The registers, which are designated as Override values, are listed below.  
These registers do not have restrictions on the number of writes.  
ID Tag Register Number  
125 (7Dh)  
UDC Usage  
Computer Setpoint  
Restrictions on Parameter Numbers in One Message  
The maximum number of writeable parameters per write request is 1.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus RTU Function Codes  
9.4.1 Write Configuration Examples  
Example #1  
The following is an example of a request to write the Gain 1 value using Function code  
21 (15 Hex).  
Request Message (Write Gain 1= 1.5 “ID Tag 1”)  
02 15 0B 06 00 03 00 01 00 02 3F C0 00 00 (CRC16)  
Where:  
02  
= Address  
15  
0B  
= Function Code 21 (15 Hex)  
= Byte Count  
06  
= Reference Type (IEEE Floating Point)  
= File Number (Access Data Value)  
= Register Address (Standard Access - Gain 1 - ID Tag 1)  
= Register Count (Floating Point Data)  
00 03  
00 01  
00 02  
3F C0 00 00 = 1.50  
(CRC16)  
This is the response to the above request.  
Response Message (The response is an echo of the request)  
02 15 0B 06 00 01 00 02 00 02 3F C0 00 00 (CRC16)  
188  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10 Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters  
plus Exception Codes  
10.1 Overview  
Introduction  
This section contains information concerning Reading, Writing, and Overriding  
parameters in this instrument. There are two types of parameters:  
•
Data Transfer—These parameters include reading control data, option status, and  
reading or changing setpoints.  
•
Configuration Data—All the configuration data is listed in the order in which it  
appears in the controller.  
Each type of parameter has the identifying codes listed with it.  
What's in this section?  
The following topics are covered in this section.  
TOPIC  
See Page  
189  
10.1 Overview  
10.2 Reading Control Data  
10.3 Read Options Status  
190  
191  
10.4 Miscellaneous Read Onlys  
10.5 Setpoints  
192  
193  
10.6 Using a Computer Setpoint (Overriding Controller Setpoint)  
10.7 Configuration Parameters  
10.8 Modbus RTU Exception Codes  
194  
195  
218  
General Information  
Non-volatile Memory Retention  
•
This controller uses non-volatile memory to store configuration data. These  
memories are guaranteed to retain data for a minimum of ten years as long as the data  
is not written and erased more than 10,000 times. In order not to exceed this number,  
it is strongly recommended that configurations which change rapidly such as  
Computer Setpoint use the Override feature which does not affect non-volatile  
memory.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Analog Parameters  
•
Whenever analog register addresses 0001 through 0074 (those that can be changed  
via communications) are changed, a Write cycle occurs after receipt of the message  
and the response is returned.  
Override Parameters  
•
Override analog register address 007D (computer setpoint) is not stored in non-  
volatile memory. It can be changed as frequently as desired with no effect on non-  
volatile memory retentivity, but the controller must remain in the slave mode.  
Digital Parameters  
•
Whenever digital configuration register addresses 0080 through 00FA are updated via  
communications, the non-volatile memory is updated as soon as the message is  
received.  
Communications Transfer Rates  
Reads minimum 20mS and writes minimum 200mS  
Supported Function Codes  
•
•
•
IR port 20 and 21  
RS485 and Ethernet ports 1,2,3,4,6,16,17,20,21  
Communications Modes of Operation  
•
When the Shed Timer is enabled and a write or override occurs the controller will  
enter Slave Mode. The keypad is locked from the operator. The purpose of this mode  
is that if communications is lost and the shed timer times out then the controller will  
enter a known state of operation. The configuration of the “Shed Mode and Output”  
and Shed Setpoint Recall are used to configure the controller’s shed state. While in  
Slave Mode pushing the MAN/AUTO key enters Emergency Manual mode. The  
local operator then has control of the output. The controller is in Monitor Mode if the  
Shed timer is disabled.  
10.2 Reading Control Data  
Overview  
The following control data can be read from this instrument:  
•
•
•
Input 1  
Input 2  
PV, SP, Output  
Register Addresses  
Use the identifying codes listed in Table 10-1 to read the specific items.  
A Write request for these codes will result in an Error message.  
190  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Table 10-1 Control Data Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Input #1  
7B  
7C  
7A  
123  
124  
122  
FP  
RD  
RD  
RD  
In Engineering Units or  
Percentage  
Input #2  
FP  
FP  
In Engineering Units or  
Percentage  
PV, SP, Output  
In Engineering Units or  
Percentage  
10.3 Read Software Options Status  
Read  
Doing a Read of register address 00B9 listed in Table 10-2 will tell you which of the  
available options are enabled / installed or disabled / not installed.  
Table 10-2 Option Status  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
00B9  
Decimal  
185  
Option Status  
(Read only)  
INT  
RD  
See Figure 10-1.  
The data field in the response message will be a decimal number from 0 to 255. Convert  
the decimal number to binary as shown in Figure 10-1.to determine which options are or  
are not active.  
0 to 255  
Convert decimal to binary  
Dual Display  
SP Programming  
0
1
= not installed  
= installed  
Limit Controller  
EXAMPLE:  
Binary  
3
SP Programming – installed  
Dual Display installed  
0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1  
–
Figure 10-1 Software Option Status Information  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.4 Miscellaneous Read Onlys  
10.4.1  
Register Addresses for Read Onlys  
The identifying register addresses listed in Table 10-3 represent some information that is  
Read only. No Writes allowed.  
Table 10-3 Miscellaneous Read Onlys  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Software Type  
009D 157  
INT  
INT  
RD  
RD  
READ only (UDC2500)  
37 = UDC2500  
Software Version 00A7 167  
READ only  
Value less than 255  
10.4.2  
SetPoint Program Read Only Information  
The identifying register addresses listed in Table 10-4 represent some information for  
SetPoint Programming that is Read only. No Writes allowed.  
Table 10-4 SetPoint Program Read Only Information  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Present SPP  
Segment Number  
00FB 251  
INT  
INT  
RD  
RD  
1 – 12  
Segment Time  
Remaining in  
Minutes  
00FC 252  
0 – 59 Minutes  
0 – 99 Hours  
Segment Time  
Remaining in  
Hours  
00FD 253  
INT  
RD  
Cycles Remaining 00FE 254  
INT  
INT  
RD  
RD  
0 – 100  
0 – 100  
Current Cycle  
Number  
00FF 255  
192  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.5 Setpoints  
Overview  
You can use two separate local setpoints in the controller. The identifying register  
addresses listed in Table 10-5 allow you to select which setpoint you want to use and to  
enter a value in Engineering Units (whichever is selected at register address 00A1) for  
that setpoint via communications.  
Register Addresses  
Make your selection using register address 00AD and enter the value for the setpoint  
chosen using register address in Table 10-5.  
Table 10-5 Setpoint Code Selections  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Local Setpoint #1  
Local Setpoint #2  
0027 039  
0035 053  
00AD 173  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Value within the setpoint  
range limits  
FP  
Value within the setpoint  
range limits  
Number of Local  
Setpoints  
INT  
00 = Local Setpoint #1  
only  
01 = 2nd Local Setpoint via  
keyboard or  
communications  
Associated Parameters  
Refer to Table 10-6 to display or change any of the parameters associated with the  
setpoint.  
Table 10-6 Setpoint Associated Parameters  
Parameter  
Register Address  
Hex  
0007, 0008  
007D  
Decimal  
Setpoint Limits  
007, 008  
125  
Computer Setpoint  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.6 Using a Computer Setpoint (Overriding Controller Setpoint)  
Overview  
You can use a setpoint generated from the computer to override the setpoint being used  
by the controller. The value generated by the computer will have ratio and bias applied  
by the controller.  
Register Addresses  
Use the identifying code in Table 10-7 to enter the computer setpoint.  
Table 10-7 Computer Setpoint Selection  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Computer  
Setpoint  
007D 125  
FP  
R/W  
Value from computer with  
Ratio and Bias applied by  
the controller. Within the  
Setpoint Range Limits in  
Engineering Units or  
Percent.  
Shed  
The computer setpoint override will continue until SHED from communications occurs  
or the controller is placed into monitor mode through communications. Doing periodic  
SLAVE READS within the shed time will allow the override to continue until  
communication is stopped and shed time elapses. Does not apply to IR communications.  
ATTENTION  
0 Shed (code 79) allows the override to continue indefinitely or until the reset shed timer  
register address 1B90 is written using function code 6 or register address 7F using  
function code 21. Any data value can be written because it is ignored.  
When SP is overridden, the upper display becomes “COM” momentarily, and the lower  
display shows the CSP value as CSXXXX.  
Table 10-7.1 Shed Timer Reset  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
7F  
Decimal  
127  
Shed Timer  
Reset  
FP  
W
Exit Slave Mode  
IR Only  
194  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Associated Parameters  
Refer to Table 10-8 for the codes to display or change any of the parameters associated  
with the computer setpoint.  
Table 10-8 Computer Setpoint Associated Parameters  
Parameter  
Register Address  
Hex  
0007, 0008  
Decimal  
Setpoint Limits  
007, 008  
039  
053  
173  
90  
Local Setpoint #1  
0027  
0035  
00AD  
005A  
005B  
007F  
Local Setpoint #2  
Local Setpoint Selection  
Computer Setpoint Ratio  
Computer Setpoint Bias  
Shed Timer Reset  
91  
127  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7 Configuration Parameters  
Overview  
Listed on the next pages are the identifying codes for the parameters in the various Set-up  
Groups in this instrument. Most of the parameters are configurable through the hosts.  
Some are Read Only and are indicated as such and cannot be changed.  
Reading or Writing  
Do a Read or Write, depending on your requirements, using the identifying code and  
format code listed in the tables. The range or selection available for each range is listed in  
the tables.  
10.7.1  
Tuning  
Table 10-9 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in the Set-up Group Tuning.  
Table 10-9 Set-up Group – Tuning  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Gain #1 or PB  
Note 1  
0001 001  
0002 002  
0003 003  
000D 013  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0.01 to 1000 Gain  
0.1 to 1000 PB  
Rate #1  
Note 1  
FP  
FP  
0.00 to 10.00  
0.02 to 50.00  
–100 to +100  
Reset #1  
Note 1  
Manual Reset  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
Gain #2 or PB #2 0004 004  
Note 1  
0.01 to 1000 Gain  
0.1 to 1000 PB  
Rate #2  
Note 1  
0005 005  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
0.00 to 10.00  
Reset #2  
Note 1  
0006 006  
0.02 to 50.00  
Cycle Time #1  
Cycle Time #2  
15  
16  
21  
22  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
1 to 120 seconds  
1 to 120 seconds  
196  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
0 = No Lockout  
Lockout  
0084 132  
INT  
R/W  
1 = Calibration Locked out  
2 = +Configuration – Timer,  
Tuning, SP Ramp,  
Accutune are read/write  
3 = +View – Tuning and SP  
Ramp are read/write, no  
other parameters are  
available  
(keyboard only)  
Changes to data are  
always possible via  
communications  
regardless of this  
configuration.  
4 =Maximum Lockout  
0 to 9999  
Security Code  
0050 080  
00BF 191  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Disable  
1 =Enable  
Man/Auto Key  
Lockout  
0 = Disable  
1 =Enable  
Run/Hold Key  
Lockout  
00EE 238  
00ED 237  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Disable  
1 =Enable  
Setpoint Key  
Lockout  
NOTE 1: Writes to these locations are not available when Accutune is enabled.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.2  
SP Ramp/Rate/Program  
Table 10-10 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Setpoint Ramp/Rate.  
Table 10-10 Set-up Group – Setpoint Ramp/Rate  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
0096 150  
INT  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Disabled  
1 = Enabled  
SP Ramp  
Single SP Ramp  
Time  
19  
001A 026  
F0 240  
25  
0 to 255 (minutes)  
Final Ramp SP  
Value  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
PV Range in Engineering  
Units  
SP Rate  
INT  
0 = Disabled  
1 = Enabled  
Rate Up (EU/HR) 006C 108  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
0 to 9999  
0 to 9999  
Rate Down  
(EU/HR)  
006D 109  
00B2 178  
INT  
R/W  
0 = Disabled  
1 = Enabled  
Setpoint  
Program  
Start Segment #  
58  
88  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
1 to 12  
End Segment  
#(Soak)  
00B0 176  
INT  
0 = Soak 2  
1 = Soak 4  
2 = Soak 6  
3 = Soak 8  
4 = Soak 10  
5 = Soak 12  
Engineering Units 00B6 182  
or Ramp  
Segments  
INT  
R/W  
0 = HRS:MIN  
1 = Degrees/Minute  
2 = EU/Hour  
Program Recycles 59  
89  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
0 to 100  
Guaranteed Soak 0057 087  
Deviation  
0 to 99.9 (0 = no soak)  
Program End  
State  
00B5 181  
INT  
R/W  
0 = Disable SP Program  
1 = Hold at Program End  
198  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Controller Status  
at Program End  
00B4 180  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Last Setpoint and Mode  
1 = Manual, Failsafe Output  
Reset SP Program 00B3 179  
(ToBEGIN)  
0 = Disable  
1 = Via Keypad  
0 = Disabled  
1 = Enabled  
PV Hotstart  
00E2 226  
INT  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
Segment #1 Ramp 0039 057  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
or  
0 to 999 (Degrees/Minute)  
Segment #2 Soak 003A 058  
Setpoint Value  
FP  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Within Setpoint Limits  
Segment #2 Soak 003B 059  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
Segment #3 Ramp 003C 060  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
or  
0 to 999 (Degrees/Minute)  
Segment #4 Soak 003D 061  
Setpoint Value  
FP  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Within Setpoint Limits  
Segment #4 Soak 003E 062  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
Segment #5 Ramp 003F 063  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
or  
0 to 999 (Degrees/Minute)  
Segment #6 Soak 0040 064  
Setpoint Value  
FP  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Within Setpoint Limits  
Segment #6 Soak 0041 065  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
Segment #7 Ramp 0042 066  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
or  
0 to 999 (Degrees/Minute)  
Segment #8 Soak 0043 067  
Setpoint Value  
FP  
R/W  
Within Setpoint Limits  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Segment #8 Soak 0044 068  
Time  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
Segment #9 Ramp 0045 069  
Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
or  
0 to 999 (Degrees/Minute)  
Segment #10  
Soak Setpoint  
Value  
0046 070  
FP  
R/W  
Within Setpoint Limits  
Segment #10  
Soak Time  
0047 071  
0048 072  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
Segment #11  
Ramp Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
or  
0 to 999 (Degrees/Minute)  
Segment #12  
Soak Setpoint  
Value  
0049 073  
004A 074  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
Within Setpoint Limits  
Segment #12  
Soak Time  
99.59 (0-99 Hrs:0-59 Min)  
200  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.3  
Accutune  
Table 10-11 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Accutune.  
Table 10-11 Set-up Group – Accutune  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex Decimal  
Fuzzy Overshoot  
Suppression  
00C1 193  
INT  
R/W  
0 = Disabled  
1 = Enabled  
0 = Accutune Disabled  
1 = Tune  
Accutune Enable  
0098 152  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Manual  
1 = Auto  
Accutune Duplex  
selection  
E1  
225  
2 = Disable (blend)  
0 = None  
3 = Process Identification  
failed  
Accutune Error  
(Read only)  
0097 151  
INT  
R/W  
4 = Accutune aborted on  
command  
5 = Running  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.4  
Algorithm  
Table 10-12 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Algorithm.  
Table 10-12 Set-up Group – Algorithm  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data  
Type  
Access  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Control  
0080 128  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
0 = ON/OFF  
1 = PID-A  
2 = PID-B  
3 = PD-A with Manual  
Reset  
4 = Three Position Step  
5 = Disable  
Algorithm  
Selection  
(Selection here will  
affect ID code 160 in  
Output Algorithms.)  
Timer  
00D8 216  
R/W  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
Period  
0063 099  
00D9 217  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
00.00 TO 99.59  
Start (Initiation)  
INT  
0 = Key (Run/Hold Key)  
1 = Alarm 2  
LDISP (Selection) 00DA 218  
INT  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = TI REM  
1 = Elapsed Time  
Timer Reset  
00D6 214  
00D7 215  
0 = Key (Run/Hold Key)  
1 = AL1 (Alarm 1 or Key)  
Timer Increment  
0 = Min (Counts hr/min)  
1 = Sec (Counts min/sec)  
202  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.5  
Output Algorithms  
Table 10-13 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Output.  
Table 10-13 Set-up Group – Output  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Output  
00A0 160  
INT  
R/W  
0 = Time Simplex  
Algorithm  
1 = Not Used  
2 = Current Simplex  
3 = Three Position Step or  
Position Proportioning  
4 = Time Duplex  
5 = Current Duplex  
6 = Current/Time Duplex  
7 = Time/Current Duplex  
Relay Cycle  
Time  
Increments  
00BE 190  
INT  
INT  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = 1 second increments  
1 = 1/3 second increments  
Motor Time for 004B 075  
Three Position  
Step  
5 to 1800 seconds  
0 = Full (100%)  
1 = Split (50%)  
Current Range 0099 153  
for Current  
Duplex  
0 = 4-20 mA  
1 = 0-20 mA  
Current Output 00EA 235  
Range  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.6  
Input 1  
Table 10-14 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Input 1.  
Table 10-14 Set-up Group – Input 1  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex Decimal  
1 = B TC  
2 = E TC H  
Input 1 Type  
00A8 168  
INT  
R/W  
3 = E TC L  
4 = J TC H  
5 = J TC M  
6 = J TC L  
7 = K TC H  
8 = K TC M  
9 = K TC L  
10 = NNM H  
11 = NNM L  
12 = Nicrosil H TC  
13 = Nicrosil L TC  
14 = R TC  
15 = S TC  
16 = T TC H  
17 = T TC L  
18 = W TC H  
19 = W TC L  
20 = 100 PT RTD  
21 = 100 PT LO RTD  
22 = 200 PT RTD  
23 = 500 PT RTD  
24 = Radiamatic RH  
25 = Radiamatic RI  
26 = 0-20 mA  
27 = 4-20 mA  
28 = 0-10 mV  
29 = 0-50 mV  
30 = 100 mV  
31 = 0-5 Vdc  
32 = 1-5 Vdc  
33 = 0-10 Vdc  
34 = Unused  
35 = Unused  
36 = Thermocouple Differential  
37 = PR40-PR20 Thermocouple  
ATTENTION  
Changing the Input Type will result in the loss of Field Calibration  
values and will restore the Factory Calibration values.  
204  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex Decimal  
Input 1  
00A9 169  
INT  
R/W  
0 = B TC  
Transmitter  
1 = E TC H  
Characterization  
2 = E TC L  
3 = J TC H  
4 = J TC M  
5 = J TC L  
6 = K TC H  
7 = K TC M  
8 = K TC L  
9 = NNM H  
10 = NNM L  
11 = Nicrosil H TC  
12 = Nicrosil L TC  
13 = R TC  
14 = S TC  
15 = T TC H  
16 = T TC L  
17 = W TC H  
18 = W TC L  
19 = 100 PT RTD  
20 = 100 PT LO RTD  
21 = 200 PT RTD  
22 = 500 PT RTD  
23 = Radiamatic RH  
24 = Radiamatic RI  
25 = Linear  
26 = Square Root  
Input 1 High  
Range Value  
001D 029  
001E 030  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
–999. to 9999. Engineering  
Units (Linear types only)  
Input 1 Low  
Range Value  
–999 to 9999. Engineering  
Units (Linear types only)  
Input 1 Ratio  
Input 1 Bias  
006A 106  
006B 107  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
–20.00 to 20.00  
–999 to 9999. Engineering  
Units  
Input 1 Filter  
002A 042  
FP  
R/W  
0 to 120 seconds  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex Decimal  
Burnout (Open  
Circuit  
Detection)  
00A4 164  
INT  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = None and Failsafe  
1 = Upscale  
2 = Downscale  
3 = No Failsafe  
Emissivity  
0017 023  
0.01 to 1.00  
206  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.7  
Input 2  
Table 10-15 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Input 2.  
Table 10-15 Set-up Group – Input 2  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex Decimal  
0 = Disable  
Input 2 Type  
00AA 170  
INT  
R/W  
1 to 25 Unused  
26 = 0-20 mA  
27 = 4-20 mA  
28 to 30 = Unused  
31 = 0-5 Vdc  
32 = 1-5 Vdc  
33 = Unused  
34 = Unused  
35 = 0 – 2 Vdc  
ATTENTION  
Changing the Input Type will result in the loss of Field Calibration  
values and will restore the Factory Calibration values.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex Decimal  
Input 2  
00AB 171  
INT  
R/W  
0 = B TC  
Transmitter  
1 = E TC H  
Characterization  
2 = E TC L  
3 = J TC H  
4 = J TC M  
5 = J TC L  
6 = K TC H  
7 = K TC M  
8 = K TC L  
9 = NNM H  
10 = NNM L  
11 = Nicrosil H TC  
12 = Nicrosil L TC  
13 = R TC  
14 = S TC  
15 = T TC H  
16 = T TC L  
17 = W TC H  
18 = W TC L  
19 = 100 PT RTD  
20 = 100 PT LO RTD  
21 = 200 PT RTD  
22 = 500 PT RTD  
23 = Radiamatic RH  
24 = Radiamatic RI  
25 = Linear  
26 = Square Root  
Input 2 High  
Range Value  
0023 035  
0024 036  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
–999. to 9999. Engineering  
Units  
Input 2 Low  
Range Value  
–999 to 9999. Engineering  
Units  
Input 2 Ratio  
Input 2 Bias  
0025 037  
0026 038  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
–20.00 to 20.00  
–999 to 9999. Engineering  
Units  
Input 2 Filter  
002B 043  
FP  
R/W  
0 to 120 seconds  
208  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.8  
Control  
Table 10-16 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
prompts in Set-up Group Control.  
Table 10-16 Set-up Group – Control  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Tuning  
Parameter  
Selection  
00AC 172  
INT  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = One set only  
1 = 2 sets keyboard selected  
2 = 2 sets with PV automatic  
switchover  
3 = 2 sets with setpoint (SP)  
automatic switchover  
Automatic  
0038  
056  
Within the PV Range in  
engineering units  
Switchover  
Value (used with  
172 selection 2  
or 3)  
Local Setpoint  
Source (Number  
of LSPs)  
00AD 173  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = One Local Setpoint  
1 = Two Local Setpoints  
Power Up Mode 0082  
Recall  
130  
Control Setpoint  
Mode  
Mode  
0 = MAN  
1 = AUTO  
2 = AUTO  
3 = LAST  
4 = LAST  
LSP  
LSP  
Last RSP  
Last SP  
Last Local SP  
RSP Source  
0083  
131  
138  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = None  
1 = Input 2  
Setpoint  
Tracking  
008A  
0 = None  
1 = LSP = PV (when in  
Manual)  
2 = LSP = RSP (when  
switched)  
Control Setpoint 0007  
High Limit  
007  
008  
135  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0 to 100% of PV  
(engineering units)  
Control Setpoint 0008  
Low Limit  
FP  
0 to 100% of PV  
(engineering units)  
Control Output  
Direction  
0087  
INT  
0 = Direct  
1 = Reverse  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
High Output  
Limit  
000E  
014  
015  
018  
020  
019  
213  
040  
183  
184  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
–5 to 105% of output  
–5 to 105% of output  
–5 to +25.0%  
Low Output  
Limit  
000F  
FP  
Output Deadband 0012  
for Time Duplex  
FP  
Output Deadband 0014  
for TPSC  
FP  
0.5 to 5.0%  
Output  
Hysteresis  
0013  
00D5  
0028  
FP  
0.0 to 100.0% of PV  
Failsafe Mode  
INT  
FP  
0 = Latching  
1 = Non latching  
Failsafe Output  
Level  
0 to 100%  
TPSC Power-up 00B7  
Output  
INT  
INT  
0 = Last  
1 = Failsafe  
TPSC Failsafe  
Output  
00B8  
0 =Motor goes to closed  
position (0%)  
1 =Motor goes to open  
position (100%)  
Proportional  
Band Units  
0094  
0095  
148  
149  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Gain  
1 = Proportional band  
Reset Units  
0 = Minutes  
1 = RPM  
PV High Range  
PV Low Range  
0036  
0037  
054  
055  
FP  
FP  
R
R
PV High Limit  
PV Low Limit  
210  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.9  
Options  
Table 10-18 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Options.  
Table 10-17 Set-up Group – Options  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
0 = None  
Auxiliary  
Output *  
0086  
134  
INT  
R/W  
1 = Input 1  
2 = Input 2  
3 = PV  
4 = Deviation  
5 = Output  
6 = Setpoint  
7 = LSP 1  
8 = LSP 2  
Low Scaling  
Factor  
0031  
0032  
049  
050  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Within the range of the  
selected variable in ID 134  
High Scaling  
Factor  
FP  
Within the range of the  
selected variable in ID 134  
0 = 4-20 mA  
1 = 0-20 mA  
Auxiliary  
Output Range  
00EC 236  
INT  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
0 = None  
1 = To Manual  
Digital Input  
#1  
00BA 186  
INT  
R/W  
2 = To Local Setpoint #1  
3 = To Local Setpoint #2  
4 = To Direct Action  
5 = To Hold Ramp  
6 = To PID Set #2  
7 = To Run Ramp  
8 = To Begin  
9 = No I (Reset)  
10 = To Manual Failsafe  
Output  
11 = Disable Keyboard  
12 = To Timer  
13 = Initiate Limit Cycle  
Tuning  
14 = Setpoint Initialization  
(SP=PV)  
15 = To RSP  
16 = Manual Latching  
17 = Output 1 tracks Input 2  
18 = Start/Restart SP Ramp or  
SP Program  
0 = Disable  
1 = +PID2  
2 = +Direct  
3 = +LSP2  
4 = +LSP1  
5 = +Run  
Digital Input  
#1  
Combinations  
00BC 188  
INT  
R/W  
Digital Input  
#2 *  
00BB 187  
00BD 189  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
Same as Digital Input #1  
Same as Digital Input #1  
Combinations  
Digital Input  
#2  
Combinations  
*
* Auxiliary Output and Digital Input #2 are mutually exclusive.  
212  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.10  
Communications  
Table 10-18 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Communications.  
Table 10-18 Set-up Group – Communications  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Communication 004D  
Address  
77  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
1 - 99  
Communications 00E7  
Type  
231  
INT  
0 = None  
1 = Disable  
2 = RS-485 Modbus  
3 = Ethernet  
IRPort Enable  
Baud Rate  
00F1  
00E8  
241  
232  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Disable  
1 =- Enable  
0 = 4800  
1 = 9600  
2 = 19200  
3 = 38400  
Transmit Delay  
004E  
00E9  
78  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
Response Delay in ms  
(1 to 500) +6ms  
Floating Point  
Byte Order  
233  
INT  
0 = Big Endian  
1 = Big Endian Byte Swap  
2 = Little Endian  
3 = Little Endian Byte Swap  
ShedEnable  
Shed Time  
00EA 234  
INT  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
004F  
00A2  
79  
0 = No Shed  
1 = 255 sample periods  
Shed Mode and  
Output  
162  
0 = Last Mode and Last Output  
1 = Manual Mode, Last Output  
2 = Manual Mode, Failsafe Output  
3 = Automatic Mode  
Shed Setpoint  
Recall  
00A3  
005A  
005B  
00A1  
163  
90  
INT  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = To Last Local Setpoint used  
1 = CSP  
Computer  
Setpoint Ratio  
–20.00 to 20.00  
Computer  
Setpoint Bias  
91  
FP  
–999 to 9999.  
0 = Percent  
1 = Engineering Units  
Comm Data  
Units  
161  
INT  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.11  
Alarms  
Table 10-19 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Alarms.  
Table 10-19 Set-up Group – Alarms  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 0009 009  
Value  
FP  
FP  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Within the range of  
selected parameter or PV  
span for deviation alarm  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 000A 010  
Value  
Within the range of  
selected parameter or PV  
span for deviation alarm  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 000B 011  
Value  
Within the range of  
selected parameter or PV  
span for deviation alarm  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 000C 012  
Value  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
Within the range of  
selected parameter or PV  
span for deviation alarm  
0 = None  
1 = Input 1  
2 = Input 2  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 008C 140  
Type  
INT  
3 = PV  
4 = Deviation  
5 = Output  
6 = Alarm on Shed  
7 = SP Event On  
8 = SP Event Off  
9 = Manual  
10 = Remote Setpoint  
11 = Failsafe  
12 = PV Rate of Change  
13 = Alarm on Digital  
Input 1  
14 = Alarm on Digital  
Input 2  
15 = Loop Break  
16 = Deviation based upon  
SP2  
17 = T/C Warning  
18 = T/C Fail  
214  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 008E 142  
Type  
INT  
INT  
INT  
INT  
INT  
INT  
INT  
FP  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Same as 140  
Same as 140  
Same as 140  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 0090 144  
Type  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 0092 146  
Type  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 008D 141  
Event  
0 = Low Alarm  
1 = High Alarm  
Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 008F 143  
Event  
0 = Low Alarm  
1 = High Alarm  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 0091 145  
Event  
0 = Low Alarm  
1 = High Alarm  
Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 0093 147  
Event  
0 = Low Alarm  
1 = High Alarm  
Alarm Hysteresis  
0029 041  
0.0 to 100% of output or  
span  
Alarm Latching for 00C8 200  
Output 1  
INT  
INT  
0 = Non Latching  
1 = Latching  
Alarm States  
00C9 201  
State = 0 = Not in Alarm  
State = 1 = In Alarm  
Bit 0 = Alarm 11 State  
Bit 1 = Alarm 12 State  
Bit 2 = Alarm 21 State  
Bit 3 = Alarm 22 State  
Event = 0 = Low  
Event = 1 = High  
Bit 4 = Alarm 11 Event  
Bit 5 = Alarm 12 Event  
Bit 6 = Alarm 21 Event  
Bit 7 = Alarm 22 Event  
Alarm 1 Blocking 00CA 202  
INT  
R/W  
0 = Disable  
1 = Block 1  
2 = Block 2  
3 = Block 1 2  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
0 = Disable  
1 = Alarm 1  
2 = Alarm 2  
Diagnostic Alarm  
009A 154  
INT  
R/W  
216  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.7.12  
Display  
Table 10-20 lists all the register addresses and ranges or selections for the function  
parameters in Set-up Group Display.  
Table 10-20 Set-up Group – Display  
Parameter  
Description  
Register  
Address  
Data Access  
Type  
Data Range or  
Enumerated Selection  
Hex  
Decimal  
0 = XXXX – Fixed  
1 = XXX.X – Floating  
decimal point to one  
2 = XX.XX – Floating  
decimal point to two  
Decimal Point 009B  
Location  
155  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = °F  
1 = °C  
Temperature  
Units  
0081  
129  
2 = None  
Power  
Frequency  
00A6  
00C0  
166  
192  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = 60 Hertz  
1 = 50 Hertz  
Language  
(Displays)  
0 = English  
1 = French  
2 = German  
3 = Spanish  
4 = Italian  
5 = Numeric  
Lower Display 00AE 174  
Enable  
INT  
INT  
R/W  
R/W  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
Lower Display 00AF 175  
0 = Setpoint  
1 = PRY – PV with Label  
2 = PRN – PV witout Label  
TC Diagnostics 009f  
159  
INT  
R/W  
0 = Enable  
1 = Disable  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
10.8 Modbus RTU Exception Codes  
Introduction  
When a master device sends a query to a slave device it expects a normal response. One  
of four possible events can occur from the master’s query:  
• Slave device receives the query without a communication error and can handle the  
query normally.  
It returns a normal response.  
• Slave does not receive the query due to a communication error.  
No response is returned. The master program will eventually process a time-out  
condition for the query.  
• Slave receives the query but detects a communication error (parity, LRC or CRC).  
No response is returned. The master program will eventually process a time-out  
condition for the query.  
• Slave receives the query without a communication error but cannot handle it (i.e.,  
request is to a non-existent coil or register).  
The slave will return with an exception response informing the master of the nature of  
the error (Illegal Data Address.)  
The exception response message has two fields that differentiate it from a normal  
response:  
Function Code Field:  
In a normal response, the slave echoes the function code of the original query in the  
function code field of the response. All function codes have a most-significant bit  
(MSB) of 0 (their values are below 80 hex). In an exception response, the slave sets  
the MSB of the function code to 1. This makes the function code value in an  
exception response exactly 80 hex higher than the value would be for a normal  
response.  
With the function code’s MSB set, the master’s application program can recognize  
the exception response and can examine the data field for the exception code.  
Data Field:  
In a normal response, the slave may return data or statistics in the data field. In an  
exception response, the slave returns an exception code in the data field. This defines  
the slave condition that caused the exception.  
218  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modbus Read, Write and Override Parameters plus Exception Codes  
Query  
Example: Internal slave error reading 2 registers starting at address 1820h from slave at slave address 02.  
02 03 18 20 00 02 CRC CRC  
Response  
Example: Return MSB in Function Code byte set with Slave Device Failure (04) in the data field.  
02 83 04 CRC CRC  
Table 10-21 Modbus RTU Data Layer Status Exception Codes  
Exception  
Code  
Definition  
Description  
Illegal Function  
The message received is not an allowable action for  
the addressed device.  
01  
Illegal Data Address  
The address referenced in the function-dependent data  
section of the message is not valid in the addressed  
device.  
02  
Illegal Data Value  
Slave Device Failure  
Slave Device Busy  
The value referenced at the addressed device location  
is no within range.  
03  
04  
The addressed device has not been able to process a  
valid message due to a bad device state.  
The addressed device has ejected a message due to a  
busy state. Retry later.  
05, 06  
07  
NAK,  
The addressed device cannot process the current  
message. Issue a PROGRAM POLL to obtain device-  
dependent error data.  
Negative Acknowledge  
Buffer Overflow  
The data to be returned for the requested number of  
registers is greater than the available buffer space.  
Function Code 20 only.  
09  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet TCP/IP  
11 Ethernet TCP/IP  
11.1 Overview  
Ethernet parameters can only be configured via the Process Instrument Explorer  
software.  
Ethernet IP Address is 10.0.0.2 as shipped from the Factory.  
The MAC address is printed on the case label of each instrument.  
When constructing a network, it is recommended that a Switch be used to connect UDCs  
to a LAN rather than using a Hub. This is because a Switch passes only those messages  
for IP addresses that are connected to the Switch while a Hub passes all message traffic.  
Using a Switch thus improves the overall throughput of the traffic to and from the UDCs.  
220  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Further information  
12 Further information  
12.1Modbus RTU Serial Communications  
Refer to Honeywell document 51-52-25-66 Modbus RTU Serial Communications User  
Manual.  
12.2Modbus Messaging on TCP/IP  
Refer to Honeywell document 51-52-25-121 MODBUS Messaging on TCP/IP  
Implementation Guide.  
12.3How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise  
Environments  
Refer to Honeywell document 51-52-05-01 How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in  
Severe Electrical Noise Environments.  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
13 Index  
Configuration Prompt Hierarchy, 33  
Control Algorithm, 46  
A
Control And Alarm Relay Contact Information, 14  
Control Modes, 100  
Control Relays, 14  
Control Set Up Group, 61, 67, 73  
Control/Alarm Circuit Wiring, 17  
Controller Failure Symptoms, 164  
Controller Grounding, 17  
Controller Output Types, 9  
Current Duplex, 52  
Aborting Accutune, 109  
Accutune Error Codes, 109  
Accutune Error Status, 45  
Accutune Iii, 104  
Accutune Set Up Group, 43, 82  
Adaptive Tune, 44  
Alarm Blocking, 81  
Alarm Hysteresis, 80  
Alarm Outputs, 9  
Alarm Relay Output Failure, 170  
Alarm Relays, 14  
Current Output, 27  
Current Output Calibration, 152  
Current Output Calibration Procedure, 153  
Current Output Failure, 166  
Current Simplex, 52  
Current/Time Duplex, 52  
Current/Time Or Time/Current Proportional Output  
Failure, 169  
Customer Support, 160  
Cycle Time (Cool), 37  
Cycle Time (Heat), 37  
Alarm Setpoints, 112  
Alarm Setpoints Display, 112  
Alarms Set Up Group, 76  
Algorithm Set Up Group, 46  
Analog Inputs, 8  
Annunciators, 93  
Application Related Problems, 159  
Atune Group, 44, 82  
Auto/Manual Key, 92  
Automatic With Local Setpoint, 100  
Automatic With Remote Setpoint, 100  
Auto-Only Mode, 97  
D
Deadband, 65  
Autotune Is Complete, 110  
Auxiliary Output Calibration, 154  
Decimal Places, 82  
Demand Tuning, 43  
Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure, 155  
Auxiliary Output Connections, 30  
Auxiliary Output Failure, 173  
Diagnostic Alarm, 81  
Diagnostic Message, 95  
Digital Input (Remote) Operation, 124  
Digital Input Selections, 69  
Digital Inputs, 8  
B
Digital Inputs Option Connections, 30  
Dimensions, 15  
Direct Acting Control, 64  
Displays, 3  
Dual Electromechanical Relay Option Output, 27  
Duplex Control, 106, 108  
Background Tests, 162  
Baud Rate, 73  
Bias, 57, 60  
Blended Tune, 107  
Burnout Protection, 57  
C
E
Calibration Mode, 149, 156  
Calibration Steps, 137  
Elapsed Time, 103  
Electrical Considerations, 17  
Electrical Noise Precautions, 17  
Electromechanical Relay Output, 24  
Email Configuration Screen, 85  
Emissivity, 58  
End Segment Number, 119  
Environmental And Operating Conditions, 11  
Equipment You Will Need To Calibrate, 139  
Error Codes, 109  
CE Conformity (Europe), 5  
Changing Control Modes, 101  
Changing The Local Setpoints, 101  
Communications Failure, 172, 173  
Communications Interface, 10  
Composite Wiring Diagram, 21  
Computer Setpoint, 194  
Computer Setpoint Ratio, 75  
Configuration, 32  
Configuration Parameters, 196  
Configuration Procedure, 34  
Error Messages, 95  
Estimated Motor Position, 113  
222  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet Communications Address, 133, 134  
Ethernet Configuration Screen, 84  
Ethernet Connection, 131  
Input 2 Set Up Group, 59  
Input 2 Set Up Wiring, 146, 147  
Input Calibration, 136  
Installation, 7  
Ethernet Status, 130  
Ethernet TCP/IP, 220  
Installation Related Problems, 159  
Integer Parameter Type, 181  
Isolation, 9  
Ethernet TCP/IP Communications Interface, 10  
External Interface Option Connections, 29, 30  
External Setpoint Program Reset, 70  
External Wiring, 18  
K
Key Error, 92  
F
Key Lockout, 92  
Keyboard Failure, 171  
Keys, 3  
Factory Calibration, 149, 156  
Failsafe Function Prompt, 114, 115  
Failsafe Manual Mode, 161  
Failsafe Mode, 66  
L
Failsafe Mode, 115  
Latching, 115  
Failsafe Output Value, 65  
Failsafe Output Value, 114  
Failsafe Output Value For Restart After A Power  
Loss, 114  
Field Wiring, 139  
Filter, 57, 60  
Floating Point Parameter Type, 181  
Function Code 20, 182  
Function Code 21, 186  
Function Codes 20 And 21, 180  
Function Prompts, 33  
Local Area Network (Lan) Settings, 133  
Local Setpoint Source, 62  
Lockout, 37  
Lockout Feature, 91  
Lockout Levels, 91  
Loop Data – Alarm Details, 127  
Loop Data – Digital Input Details, 128  
Loop Data Screen, 126  
Loopback Test, 75  
Lower Display Key Parameter Prompts, 94  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression, 43, 110  
Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression, 44  
M
Mains Power Supply, 17, 22  
Manual, 100  
G
Manual Reset, 36  
Manual Tune, 107  
Gain, 35  
Gain 2, 36  
Manual/Auto Key Lockout, 38  
Minimum And Maximum Range Values, 137  
Modbus Read, Write And Override Parameters, 189  
Modbus RTU Exception Codes, 218  
Modbus RTU Function Codes, 180  
Model Number Interpretation, 12  
Monitoring T, 89  
Guaranteed Soak, 119  
H
Hotstart, 71  
Hysteresis (Output Relay), 65  
Motor Position Display, 113  
Motor Time, 54  
Mounting, 15  
Mounting Method, 16  
Mounting Procedure, 16  
I, J  
Infrared Communications, 4  
Infrared Communications, 10  
Infrared Communications, 73  
Input 1 Actuation Type, 55, 59  
Input 1 And Input 2 Wiring Terminals, 139  
Input 1 Calibration Procedure, 144  
Input 1 Connections, 23  
N
Non-Latching, 115  
Input 1 High Range Value, 56, 60  
Input 1 Low Range Value, 57, 60  
Input 1 Set Up Group, 55  
Input 1 Set Up Wiring, 140  
Input 2 Calibration Procedure, 147  
Input 2 Connections, 24  
O
Open Collector Output, 26  
Operating Parameters, 94  
Operator Interface, 90  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option Status, 191  
Reset, 36  
Output Algorithm, 51  
Output Calibration, 151  
Output Limit, 65  
Reset 2, 36  
Reset Program To Beginning, 120  
Reset Units, 66  
Output Set Up Group, 51  
Overriding Controller Setpoint, 194  
Restore Factory Calibration, 149  
Restore Output Factory Calibration, 156  
Restoring Factory Configuration, 174  
Reverse Acting Control, 64  
RTD Inputs, 141  
Run/Hold Key, 92  
Run/Hold Key, 116  
Run/Hold Key Lockout, 38  
Run/Monitor The Program, 123  
P, Q  
P.I.E. Tool, 131  
P.I.E. Tool Ethernet And Email Configuration  
Screens, 84  
P.I.E. Tool Maintenance Screens, 125  
Parts Identification, 178  
Parts List, 177  
PD With Manual Reset, 48  
Permissible Wiring Bundling, 18  
Physical Considerations, 15  
PID A, 47  
S
Security Code, 37  
Security Code, 90  
Set Point Select Function Key, 92  
Set Up Group, 33  
PID B, 47  
Position Proportional Or 3 Position Step Test  
Failures, 161  
Set Up Wiring Procedure For Auxiliary Output, 154  
Setpoint Code Selections, 193  
Setpoint High Limit, 64  
Setpoint Low Limit, 64  
Setpoint Ramp, 39  
Power Consumption, 10  
Power Failure Symptoms, 166  
Power Inrush Current, 10  
Power Line Frequency, 83  
Power Outage, 124  
Setpoint Ramp, 116  
Setpoint Ramp Final Setpoint, 40  
Setpoint Ramp Time, 39  
Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming, 118  
Setpoint Rate, 40  
Setpoint Rate, 117  
Setpoint Select Key Lockout, 38  
Setpoint Tracking, 63  
Power Outage, 117  
Power-Up Tests, 161  
Pre-Installation Information, 8  
Process Instrument Explorer, 4  
Program Contents, 118  
Program Record Sheet, 122  
Program State, 120  
Setpoints, 101, 193  
Program Termination State, 120  
Proportional Band, 35  
Proportional Band 2, 36  
Proportional Band Units, 66  
Pv Hot Start, 115  
Set-Up Group Accutune, 201  
Set-Up Group Alarms, 214  
Set-Up Group Algorithm, 202  
Set-Up Group Communications, 213  
Set-Up Group Control, 209  
Set-Up Group Display, 217  
Set-Up Group Input 1, 204  
Set-Up Group Input 2, 207  
Set-Up Group Options, 211  
Set-Up Group Output, 203  
Set-Up Group Setpoint Ramp/Rate, 198  
Set-Up Group Tuning, 196  
Shed Time, 74  
Single Display Functionality, 97  
Single Display Parameters, 98  
Soak Segments, 119  
Software Options Status, 191  
Software Type, 192  
Software Upgrade Part Number, 176  
Software Upgrades, 175  
Software Version, 192  
R
Ramp Time Or Rate Segments, 118  
Ramp Unit, 119  
Ramp/Soak Profile Example, 120  
Rate, 35  
Rate 2, 36  
Ratio, 57, 60  
Read Onlys, 192  
Reading Control Data, 190  
Recycle Number, 119  
Register Address Structure, 181  
Register Count, 181  
Relay Cycle Times, 54  
Remote Setpoint Source, 63  
Removing The Chassis, 179  
224  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software Version Number, 160  
Solid State Relay Output, 25  
SP Ramp Set Up Group, 39  
SP Tuning, 43  
Troubleshooting/Service, 158  
Tune, 44, 104  
Tune For Duplex (Heat/Cool), 105  
Tuning, 35  
Specifications, 8  
Spprog, 41  
Sprate, 40  
Start Segment Number, 119  
Start Up Procedure For Operation, 99  
Station Address, 73  
Tuning Indicators, 104  
Tuning Parameter Sets, 61  
Tuning Set Up Group, 35  
Two Sets Of Tuning Constants, 110  
TX Delay, 74  
Status Data, 129  
U
Status Tests, 161  
Stray Rejection, 8  
Universal Output Functionality And Restrictions, 20  
Suppression Devices, 18  
Switch Between Two Sets Via Keyboard, 112  
Switching Between Setpoints, 102  
V
Voltage And Resistance Equivalents For 0% And  
100% Range Values, 137, 139  
T
W, X, Y, Z  
Temperature Units, 82  
Test Failures, 161  
Weigh, 10  
Thermocouple Inputs Using A Thermocouple  
Source, 141  
Wiring, 17  
Wiring Bundling, 18  
Thermocouple Inputs Using An Ice Bath, 140  
Three Position Step, 48  
Wiring Connections For 1 To 5 Volt Input – Input 2,  
147  
Three Position Step Control Algorithm, 113  
Three Position Step Control Connections, 28  
Three Position Step Control Output Failure, 167  
Time Current Duplex, 52  
Wiring Connections For 4 To 20 Ma Input – Input 2,  
146  
Wiring Connections For Calibrating Auxiliary  
Output, 154  
Time Duplex, 52  
Wiring Connections For Calibrating Current Output,  
152  
Wiring Connections For Radiamatic, Milliampere,  
Millivolts, Or Volts (Except 0 To 10 Volts), 142,  
143  
Time Proportional Output, 51  
Time Proportional Output Failure, 168  
Time Remaining, 103  
Time Simplex, 51  
Time-Out, 103  
Timer, 102  
Timer, 49  
Wiring Connections For Rtd (Resistance  
Thermometer Device), 141  
Wiring Diagrams, 19  
Transmitter Characterization, 56  
Transmitter Power For 4-20 Ma, 31  
Troubleshooting Aids, 159  
Troubleshooting Procedures, 165  
Wiring The Controller, 21  
Worksheet, 118  
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sales and Service  
14 Sales and Service  
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one of the offices below.  
Honeywell EOOD  
Phone: +(359) 2 40 20  
900  
Phone: +965 326  
2934/1821  
Fax: +965 326 1714  
AFRICA  
ASIA PACIFIC  
Control Products  
Asia Pacific  
Headquarters  
Phone: +(65) 6355-2828  
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033  
Malaysia  
Honeywell Engineering  
Sdn Bhd  
Phone: +(60-3) 7950-  
4776  
Fax: +(60-3) 7958-8922  
Russian Federation  
(RF),  
ZAO "Honeywell"  
Phone: +7 (095) 796 98  
00  
FAX: +(359) 2 40 20 990  
Mediterranean &  
Czech Republic  
Honeywell spol. s.r.o.  
Phone: +420 242 442  
232  
FAX: +7 (495) 797 99 64 African  
Distributors  
Slovak Republic  
Honeywell s.r.o.  
Phone: +421-2-58247  
410  
Asia Pasific Global  
Technical Support  
Field Instruments  
Phone: +65 6580 3156  
Fax: +65 6445-3033  
Process Instruments  
Phone: (603) 76950 4777  
Fax: (603) 7958 8922  
New Zealand  
Honeywell Limited  
Honeywell SpA  
Phone: +39 (02) 250 10  
604  
FAX: +39 (02) 250 10  
659  
Phone: +(64-9) 623-5052 FAX: +420 242 442 131  
Fax: +(64-9) 623-5060  
FAX: +421-2-58247 415  
Toll Free (0800) 202-088  
Denmark  
Honeywell A/S  
Phone: +(45) 39 55 55 55  
FAX: +(45) 39 55 55 58  
Spain  
Honeywell S.A.  
Phone: +34 (0)91313 61  
00  
Philippines  
South Africa (Republic  
of) and sub saharan  
Honeywell Southern  
Africa  
Honeywell S.A. Pty. Ltd.  
Phone: +27 11 6958000  
FAX +27 118051504  
Honeywell Systems  
(Philippines) Inc.  
Phone: +(63-2) 633-  
2830-31/  
636 1661-62  
Fax: +(63-2) 638-4013  
FAX: +34 (0)91313 61 30  
Finland  
Australia  
Honeywell OY  
Phone: +358 (0) 20752  
2753  
FAX: +358 (0) 20752  
2751  
Honeywell Limited  
Phone: +(61) 7-3846  
1255  
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481  
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36  
Toll Free Fax:  
Sweden  
Honeywell AB  
Phone: +(46) 8 775 55 00  
FAX: +(46) 8 775 56 00  
Singapore  
NORTH AMERICA  
Canada  
Honeywell LTD  
Phone: 1-800-737-3360  
FAX: 1-800-565-4130  
Switzerland  
Honeywell AG  
Phone: +41 18552448  
FAX: +(41) 1 855 24 45  
Honeywell Pte Ltd.  
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278  
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033  
1300-36-04-70  
France  
Honeywell SA  
Phone: +33 (0)1  
60198075  
China – PRC - Beijing  
Honeywell China Inc.  
Phone: +(86-10) 8458-  
3280  
Turkey  
South Korea  
Honeywell Turkey A.S.  
Phone: +90 216 578 71  
00  
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd  
Phone: +(822) 799 6315  
Fax: +(822) 792 9015  
FAX: +33 (0)1 60198201  
USA  
Honeywell Process  
Solutions,  
Phone: 1-800-343-0228  
FAX: 1-717-771-8251  
Email:sc-cp-appssales@  
honeywell.com  
Fax: +(86-10) 8458-4650  
Germany  
Honeywell AG  
Phone: +49 (69)8064336  
FAX: +49 (69)806497336  
FAX: +90 216 575 66 35  
Thailand  
Honeywell Systems  
(Thailand) Ltd.  
Phone: +(662) 693-3099  
FAX: +(662) 693-3089  
China – PRC - Shanghai  
Honeywell China Inc.  
Phone: (86-21) 5257-  
4568  
Ukraine  
Honeywell  
Tel: +380-44-201 44 74  
Fax: +380-44-201-44-75  
Hungary  
Honeywell Kft.  
Phone: +36-1-451 4300  
FAX: +36-1-451 4343  
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826  
LATIN AMERICA  
Argentina  
Honeywell S.A.I.C.  
Phone: +(54-11) 4383-  
3637  
United Kingdom  
Honeywell Control  
Systems  
Taiwan R.O.C.  
China – PRC - Chengdu  
Honeywell China Inc.  
Phone: +(86-28) 8678-  
6348  
Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.  
Phone: +(886-2) 2245-  
1000  
Ltd.  
Italy  
Phone: +44 (0)1344  
655251  
FAX: +44 (0) 1344  
655554  
Honeywell S.p.A.  
Phone: +39 02 92146  
307/  
FAX: +(54-11) 4325-6470  
FAX: +(886-2) 2245-3241  
Fax: +(86-28) 8678-7061  
Brazil  
Honeywell do Brasil &  
Cia  
Phone: +(55-11) 7266-  
1900  
FAX: +(55-11) 7266-1905  
SE Asia Countries  
see Honeywell Pte Ltd  
(Singapore)  
for:  
Pakistan  
Cambodia  
Guam  
Laos  
Myanmar  
Vietnam  
East Timor  
395  
China – PRC - Xi’an  
Honeywell China Ltd -  
Xi’an.  
Phone: +(86-29) 8833-  
7490  
MIDDLE EAST  
Abu Dhabi U A E  
Middle East  
Headquarters  
Honeywell Middle East  
Ltd.  
FAX: +39 0292146377  
The Netherlands  
Honeywell B.V.  
Phone: +31 (0) 20  
5656200  
Fax: +(86-29) 8833-7489  
Chile  
Phone: +971 2 4041246  
FAX: +971 2 4432536  
FAX: +31 (0) 20 5656210  
China – PRC Shenzhen-  
Honeywell China Inc.  
Phone: +(86) 755-2518-  
1226  
Fax: +(86) 755-2518-  
1221  
Honeywell Chile, S.A.  
Phone: +(56-2) 233-0688  
FAX: +(56-2) 231-6679  
Norway  
Honeywell A/S  
Phone: (45) 39 55 55 55  
Sultanate of Oman  
Honeywell & Co Oman  
LLC  
Phone: +968 24 701153/  
Ext.33  
Mexico  
SE Asia Countries  
see Honeywell  
Automation  
India Ltd for:  
Bangladesh  
Nepal  
Honeywell S.A. de C.V.  
Phone: +(52) 55 5259-  
1966  
Poland  
Indonesia  
Honeywell Sp. zo.o  
Phone: +48-22-6060900  
FAX: +48-22-6060901  
FAX +968 24 787351  
PT Honeywell Indonesia  
Phone: +(62) 21-535-  
8833  
FAX: +(52) 55 5570-2985  
Saudia Arabia  
Honeywell Turki Arabia  
Ltd  
Puerto Rico  
Honeywell Inc.  
Phone: +(809) 792-7075  
FAX: +(809) 792-0053  
Sri Lanka  
FAX: +(62) 21-5367 1008  
Portugal  
Jubail Office  
Honeywell Portugal Lda  
Phone: +351 21 424  
5000  
Phone: +966-3-341-0140  
Fax: +966-3-341-0216  
Honeywell - ATCO  
Dammam Office  
Phone: 0096638304584  
Fax:  
EUROPE  
Austria  
Honeywell Austria GmbH  
Phone: +43 (316)400123  
FAX: +43 (316)40017  
India Automation India  
Honeywell Ltd.  
Phone:+(91) 5603-9400  
Fax: +(91) 5603-9600  
FAX: +351 21 424 50 99  
Trinidad Honeywell Inc.  
Phone: +(868) 624-3964  
FAX: +(868) 624-3969  
Romania  
Japan Honeywell Inc.  
Phone: +(81) 3 6730  
7150  
Honeywell Bucharest  
Phone: +40 (0) 21  
2316437  
0096638338059Kuwait  
Belgium  
Venezuela Honeywell CA  
Phone: +(58-2) 238-0211  
FAX: +(58-2) 238-3391  
Honeywell Kuwait KSC  
Phone: +965 242 1327 to  
3 Fax: +965 242 8315  
and  
Honeywell SA/NV  
Phone: +32 (0) 2 728 24  
07  
FAX: +32 (0) 2 728 22 45  
Bulgaria  
Fax: +(81) 3 6730 7228  
FAX: +40 (0) 21 2316439  
226  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4/07  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
UDC2500 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual  
4/07  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Hans Grohe Plumbing Product 40808XX0 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Automobile Accessories 95541 User Manual
Hasbro Games 33500 User Manual
Healthrider Treadmill 831297871 User Manual
Honeywell Door 6150RF User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Personal Computer 520 5 XX User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Server A7818 IE002 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Switch CZ155A#B1H User Manual
Humax Satellite TV System F2 Green User Manual
Humminbird Fish Finder 531571 1_C User Manual